Ge Cti Install

TechnicalPublications

Direction 2152926–100Revision 8

GE Medical SystemsHISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICESYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL

Copyright� 1998 by General Electric Company

DIRECTION 2152926–100REV 8 GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SERVICESYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL

ii

NOTES



iii

· THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

· IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THANENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATIONSERVICES.

· DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUALHAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.

· FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICEPROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OROTHER HAZARDS.

· CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

· SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRELANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRETRADUIRE.

· NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LEMANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.

· LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LETECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DESDANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

· DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.

· FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ESAUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.

· VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESESKUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDENWURDE.

· WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DESKUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCHELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHRENKOMMEN.

· ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

· SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUENO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIODE TRADUCCIÓN.

· NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO YCOMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.

· LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE ELPROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONESPROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRANATURALEZA.

WARNING

AVERTISSEMENT

WARNUNG

AVISO



iv

· ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRADISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.

· SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS,SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DOCLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.

· NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO ECOMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.

· O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DOTÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

· IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILESOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

· SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE ILMANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDEREDIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.

· SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVERCONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.

· NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FARCOMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLAMANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONEELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

ATENÇÃO

AVVERTENZA



v

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should bethoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place thisequipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist andcooperate in placing this equipment in use.

Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, nopractical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to takeadequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation.

It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with therecommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reportsavailable from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of theInternational Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.

The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, andrepresentatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.

Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall beperformed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed bylicensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall beperformed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highlysophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will useits own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of theapplicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE field engineers, personnel of third-party servicecompanies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATIONAll packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in shipment ”written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General Electricrepresentative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrierimmediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held forinspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested withinthis 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At thistime be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged andextent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.6/17/94



vi

NOTES



vii

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

1 13 February 1996 Initial Release

2 June 1996 Content Update

3 August, 1996 Chapter 13 removed, see System Service Manual(s) for LFC and System Reconfigura-tion information. Some fonts and charcters changed for more reliable electronic repre-sentation.

4 June 1997 CT/i 3.6 and CQA 966105, modified Alignments chapter, replaced Retest Matrix chapter(chapter 12) with Replacement Test and Verification chapter, corrected FORM F4879.

5 May, 1997 CT/i 3.5

6 May, 1997 CT/i 3.6

7 October, 1997 CT/i 4.0 & Performix Tube modifications. This document supports both HSA Tube & Per-formix Tube Installations. Miscellaneous corrections to support current production.

8 18 May, 1998 Manual changed to support NexGen (Octane) Computer Configuration.Removed: References to touch montor (no longer option on Octane) in Chapter 1Added: Installation drawing for screw–less heyboard table top in Chapter 2Added: Octane Jack Identifiers, Octane Console Power Diagram, Back view Octane

Computer, Data Central Box and EMC/Non–EMC Interconnect Diagrams toChapter 2.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISIONNUMBER NUMBER

Cover to Blank 8(i to ii)

iii to vi 8

vii to xviii 8

1–1 to 1–26 8

2–1 to 2–36 8

3–1 to 3–10 8


4–1 to 4–8 8

5–1 to 5–18 8

6–1 to 6–20 8

7–1 to 7–10 8

8–1 to 8–36 8

9–1 to 9–28 8


10–1 to 10–48 8

11–1 to 11–14 8

Blank to Rear –



viii

INTRODUCTION

This book has 11 Chapters which contain the necessary information to correctly install the your system in asystematic way. It includes hardware positioning and anchoring information, cable connections and checks,subsystem integration, functional checks and system tests.

Every chapters present the tasks in the order that they must occur. Each chapter has all the information necessaryto complete its intended task intended and validate results. Tasks are organized in the order by which they mustoccur. Please see follow each chapter through to completion before proceeding to the next. Missing a step couldseverely impact the effectiveness and quality of the installation, as well as and your own efficiently.

Plan ahead, to work more effectively and efficiently. Review this installation manual before beginning. For example, ifyour system has additional options, we would recommend running the option cables when initially cabling your systemand leaving option(s) unhooked until the system has passed the initial image series.

Note: If you require assistance, or have any questions on any portion of theinstallation or integration procedure, please contact your local GE Serviceprovider.

START

CustomerTurnover

Field Site Preparation (See Preinstallation ManualInstallation And Power Checks)

Integrationand

Image Series



ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 – POSITION SUBSYSTEMS 1–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 Install Table/Gantry Introduction 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1–1 Floor and Room Preparation 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–2 Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–3 Pre–Installation Template 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–4 Installation Tool Kit 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–5 Required Common Tools and Supplies 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–2 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–1 Establish the Room Layout: 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–2 Position the Gantry: 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–3 Level the Gantry: 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–4 Position the Table: 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–5 Level the Table: 1–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–6 Tighten the Lock Rings: 1–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–7 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–8 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–9 Install the Anchors: 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4 Install Table Footswitch Assembly 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5 Position the Power Distribution Unit 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–6–1 Gantry Base Covers 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7 Install Operator Console 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–7–1 Remove Front Cover 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–2 Attach Stabilizer Pads 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–3 Attach Keyboard Table Top 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–4 Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console 1–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–5 Monitor Placement 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–6 Seismic Mounting 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 2 – Install Power, Ground and Interconnect Cables 2–1. . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 Introduction 2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2 System Power and Ground Guidelines 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3 Electrical Inspection 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4 System Component Identification 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5 Cable Color Identifiers 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 Console Wiring 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–6–1 Console Power (Indigo Systems) 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–2 Console Power (Octane Systems) 2–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–3 Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems) 2–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–4 Computer Carrier (Octane Systems) 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–5 Central Data Box (Octane Systems) 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–6 Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only) 2–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–7 Back Bulkhead 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–8 Keyboard and Trackball Cables 2–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



x

TABLE OF CONTENTS –continued–

2–6–9 Display Monitor, Color option 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–10 RX Display Monitor 2–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–7 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections 2–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7–1 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7–2 Non–EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections 2–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–8 Table and A7 Panel Connections 2–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections 2–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–9–1 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC Supply Output Connections 2–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–2 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections 2–21. . . . . . . . . . 2–9–3 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Circuit Breaker Panel 2–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–4 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Input Power Panel Connections 2–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–5 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View) 2–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–10 System Ground Connections 2–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11 Contractor Connections 2–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 3 – System Continuity and Ground Checks 3–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Section 3–1 with non–EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.

3–1 Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–1 Introduction 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–1–1 Required Tools: 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–2 Site Ground Impedance Check (Non–EMC systems w/PDU part number 2133533) 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–2–1 Ground Specifications 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–3 Site Ground Current Check (Non–EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–3. .

3–1–3–1 Required Tools: 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–3–2 Check Ground Current 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–4 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (Non–EMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–4. . . . . 3–1–5 Site Ground Continuity Check (Non–EMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–5. . . . . . . .

Use Section 3–2 with EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.

3–2 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–1 Introduction 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–1–1 Required Tools: 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–2 Site Ground Impedance Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–6. . . .

3–2–2–1 Ground Specifications 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–3 Site Ground Current Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–7. . . . . . .

3–2–3–1 Required Tools: 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–3–2 Check Ground Current 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–4 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (EMC systems w/PDU part number 2133533) 3–8. . 3–2–5 Site Ground Continuity Check (EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533) 3–9. . .

CHAPTER 4 – PDU Integration 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 Systems with PDU 2133533 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–1 Introduction 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–2 Required Tools 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–3 PDU 2133533 Area Designators 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xi


4–1–4 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–1 Circuit Breakers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–2 Relay Board 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–3 Power Switches 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–4 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–5 Covers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–5 Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–6 Line Transformer Settings Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–6–1 Line Input Conditions: 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–7 System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–8 Gantry Display TestSystems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–9 Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 5 – Computer Integration 5–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1 Introduction 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2 Required Tools 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3 Requirements/Assumptions: 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4 Power Up ’ Stop for Maintenance 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5 Keyboard Configuration 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6 Non–English Keyboard Configuration 5–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–6–1 Start System ’ Stop the CT/i Auto–Start 5–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 Touch Calibration (Hardware Option) 5–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8 Monitor Set Up 5–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–8–1 Monitor Manual Use 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–2 Factory Pre–Set 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–3 Center the Raster 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–4 Set Monitor Color Temperature 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–5 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Set–up 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–6 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt. 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–7 Adjust Pincushion 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–8 Adjust Convergence 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–9 Passwords 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9–1 Default Passwords 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–10 Set Timezone and Time 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11 Change Tube 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–11–1 New Tube 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12 Reconfig 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–12–1 reconfig the OC 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12–2 reconfig the SBC 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–13 Restore System State 5–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14 Install Options – (Customer Purchased Option(s)) 5–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15 Verify Options 5–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16 Adjust Intercom Volume 5–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–16–1 Autovoice and CBT 5–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xii


APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SET–UP TIPS “From Field Service Tips, Rev 9.” 5–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5B touch screen defaults 5–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 6 – Table/Gantry Integration 6–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 Introduction 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2 Required Tools 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–1 Verify/Perform 6–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6 Collimator Characterization 6–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6–1 Data Entry Hints 6–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6–2 Verify/Perform 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–7 Check Alignment Light Position 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–1 Internal Axial Lights 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–3 Coronal Lights 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–8 Laser Warning Labels 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9 Alignment Light Visibility 6–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10 Intercom Check 6–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11 Tilt Characterization 6–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12 Elevation Characterization 6–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13 Cradle Characterization 6–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14 Interference Test 6–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15 Emergency Stop Check 6–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 6A Axial Encoder Check 6–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6B Axial Brake Check 6–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 7 – DAS Integration 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1 Introduction 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1–1 Failure Protocol 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1–2 Special Handling Precautions 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1–2–1 Antistatic Handling 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1–2–2 Cleanliness 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1–3 Required Tools 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2 Verify X–Ray 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–2–1 X–Ray Verification Analysis 7–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2–2 Advanced Features – Channel, View and Box Reporting 7–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3 Check System Microphonics 7–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 7A HP–DAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS 7–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xiii


CHAPTER 8 – Generator Calibration 8–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1 Introduction 8–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2 Required Tools 8–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3 Safety Precautions 8–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4 mA Meter Check 8–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5 New Tube Seed Shift 8–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors 8–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–6–1 Install HV Divider 8–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–2 Setup Instrumentation 8–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–3 Calibrate the Cathode 8–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–4 Calibrate the Anode 8–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–7 Measure Total kV 8–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8 Verify kV Meter 8–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–8–1 Remove the external HV Divider: 8–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9 Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check 8–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10 KV Rise and Fall Times 8–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–10–1 Measure Rise Time 8–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10–2 Measure Fall Time 8–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–11 Verify Internal Scan Timer 8–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks 8–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 8A Tube Usage 8–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8B Tube heat Soak and Seasoning 8–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8C Verify ma and kv 8–35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 9 – System Alignments 9–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1 Introduction 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2 Required Tools 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3 Gantry Geometry Definitions 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4 Site Ground Current Checks 9–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5 Plane of Rotation (POR) 9–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6 X–Ray Beam on Detector Window (BOW) 9–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7 Isocenter (ISO) 9–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–7–1 Acquire ISO Air scans 9–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–2 Acquire ISO pin scans 9–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–3 Analyze ISO scans 9–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–4 Adjust Isocenter 9–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–8 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG 9–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–1 CBF 9–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–2 ADJUSTING CBF 9–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–3 SAG 9–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 9A Radial Alignment 9–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xiv


CHAPTER 10 – System Tests 10–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1 Introduction 10–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2 Calibration Process 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–2–1 Prepare the QA Phantom 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–2 Calibration Process Introduction 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–3 Check for the Presence of Cal Files 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–4 Calibration Process A 10–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–5 Calibration Process B 10–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–3 How to Scan with Protocols 10–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–4 Adjust CT Number 10–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5 How to Analyze Calibration data 10–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6 System Tests 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–6–1 Introduction 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–2 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–3 Tomographic Plane Indication 10–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–4 Exposure Time Accuracy 10–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–5 System Scanning Test 10–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–7 Image Series 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–1 Scan Protocol 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–2 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–3 Image Series Term Definitions 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–4 Image Series for CT/i System 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–7–4–1 Analyze Image Series 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–5 QA Image Series 10–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–7–5–1 Analyze QA Image Series 10–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–8 IMAGE DATA SHEET 48cm/L 10–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–9 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–10 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–14 Save System State 10–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning 10–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 10A Install Gantry Base Covers 10–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10B Thermal Test 10–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10C Increment Cradle 10–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10D Streak Test 10–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10E Artifact Definitions 10–35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10F Q–Cal 10–42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10G Calibrate Crosstalk 10–44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10H Generate Alpha Vector CaL 10–45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10I Image Troubleshooting 10–46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 11 – F4879X 11–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–1 Form F4879X (Total Eleven pages) 11–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xv

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS

ILLUSTRATION 1–1 Installation Hardware 1–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–2 Leveling Pad and Anchor Locations 1–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–3 Gantry/Table Level Locations 1–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–4 Redundant Anchor Locations 1–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–5 Anchor Assembly 1–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–6 Adjust Leveling pad 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–7 Install Table Footswitch Assembly 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–8 Operator console Front Cover 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–9 Console Stabilizer Pads 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–10 Attach keyboard to Table Top 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–11 Attach keyboard to Table Top 1–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–12 console Position 1–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–13 Console Monitor Placement 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–14 Seismic Mounting Hole Locations 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–15 Gantry Front Shroud Hinge 1–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–16 Hinge pin detail 1–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 1–17 rear cover hinge pin 1–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–1 Excess cable storage configuration 2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–2 Power Detail (Indigo Systems) 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–3 Power Detail (Octane Systems) 2–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–4 Computer Carrier Detail (Indigo Systems) 2–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–5 Computer Carrier Detail (Octane Systems) 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–6 Computer (Octane Systems) Central Data Box 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–7 Specialix Detail 2–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–8 Back Bulkhead Detail 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–9 Keyboard/Trackball Detail 2–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–10 Display Monitor Detail 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–11 Rx Monitor Detail 2–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–12 Gantry 2–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–13 A1A5 Panel, detail a 2–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–14 EMC Gantry – Detail B 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–15 Non–EMC – Detail B 2–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–16 HiSpeed Advantage Table 2–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–17 A2A7 Panel – Detail A 2–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–18 PDU Area Locations 2–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–19 HVDC Supply OUtput Connections 2–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xvi

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS –continued–

ILLUSTRATION 2–20 Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections 2–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–21 A3 Panel 2–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–22 Input Power Panel Connections 2–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–23 A4 Panel (Bottom View) 2–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–24 X–Ray Warning Light and Door Interlock Circuit 2–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–25 System Ground Connections 2–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–26 Non–emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram 2–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–27 EMC HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram 2–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–28 Non–emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram 2–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 2–29 emc HiSpeed CT/i Interconnect Diagram 2–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



ILLUSTRATION 4–1 PDU 2133533 Area Designators 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 4–2 PDU 2133533 tap positions (Rear) 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 4–3 PDU 2133533 CONTROL BOARD (A6 Panel) 4–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 5–1 Monitor Setup Flowchart 5–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 6–1 laser warning and precautions 6–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 6–2 Measure elevation distance 6–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 6–3 CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION PIN LOCATIONS 6–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 7–1 display Channel and Data Value 7–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 7–2 Analysis softkeys 7–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–1 Chapter Flowchart 8–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–2 Axial Drive Status and Control Panel 8–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–3 Bleeder Installation 8–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–4 Rise Time Measurement 8–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–5 Fall Time Measurement 8–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 8–6 Tube Usage Initial Screen 8–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–1 System Alignment overview 9–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–2 Gantry Geometry 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–3 Plane of Rotation 9–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–4 Position Film for Beam On Window 9–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–5 detail of mounting/adjustment hardware 9–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–6 RADIAL ALIGNMENT TOOL 9–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–7 Rotational Hardware 9–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 9–8 Mounting/adjustment Hardware (detail) 9–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–1 System Test Overview 10–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–2 Cal List/Select Example 10–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–3 Detailed Calibration screen 10–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–4 Detailed Calibration screen 10–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xvii

TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS –continued–

ILLUSTRATION 10–5 Protocol List (Example) 10–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–6 Adjust Window Width/Level with Mouse 10–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–7 Reposition ROI with Mouse 10–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ILLUSTRATION 10–8 Base Cover Installation Drawing 10–31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



xviii

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE 2–1 System Component Identifiers 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–2 Cable Color Identifiers 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–3 Jack Identifiers (Indigo Consoles) 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–4 Jack Identifiers (Octane Consoles) 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–5 System Ground connections 2–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–6 Console (2169455) Cables Interconnect List (OCTANE SystemS ONLY) 2–36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 2–7 Console (2169455) Power and Ground (OCTANE SystemS ONLY) 2–38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 4–1 PDU 2133533 Line Tap Connection Table 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–1 Video output (measured into 75W at bnc output) 5–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–2 Pixel Clock Output 5–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–3 VIDEO TIMING CHARACTERISTIC 5–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–4 VIDEO DISPLAY FORMAT 5–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–5 HOST COMMUNICATIONS/CONTROL SERIAL PORT (Analog Interface Only*) 5–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 5–6 CT/i DISPLAY MONITOR VIDEO CHARACTERISTICS & TIMING PARAMETERS 5–17. . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 7–1 Specification Limits for DC Offsets and Noise 7–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 8–1 kV Rise and Fall Time Record Table 8–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 8–2 Heat Soak and Stability Parameters MX_165_CT_l SCAN TABLE 8–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 8–3 HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS MX_200_CT SCAN TABLE 8–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–1 SMALL CAL N # 10–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–2 LARGE CAL N # 10–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–3 Adjust CT Number Worksheet 10–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–4 N Number Summary 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–5 Perpendicular Alignment Scan Parameters 10–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–6 Tomographic Plane Indication Scan Parameters 10–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–7 Exposure Time Accuracy Scan Parameters 10–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–8 System Scanning Test scan parameters 10–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–9 CT/i Image Series Scan Parameters 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–10 Image Series QA scan Parameters 10–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–11 Thermal Test Scan Parameters 10–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–12 Cradle Incrementation Specs 10–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE 10–13 Streak Test Scan Parameters 10–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



1–1

CHAPTER 1 – POSITION SUBSYSTEMS

Usage Note: CT Service Engineering constantly updates thismanual to match product improvements. Use the Installationbook that arrives with the system to install it. Any otherrevisions of this manual may not exactly match this systeminstallation. Use other revisions of this Installation manual forreference purposes only.

CHAPTER 1 CONTENTS1–1 Install Table/Gantry Introduction 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1–1 Floor and Room Preparation 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–2 Overview 1–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–3 Pre–Installation Template 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–4 Installation Tool Kit 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1–5 Required Common Tools and Supplies 1–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–2 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–1 Establish the Room Layout: 1–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–2 Position the Gantry: 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–3 Level the Gantry: 1–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–4 Position the Table: 1–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–5 Level the Table: 1–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–6 Tighten the Lock Rings: 1–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–7 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes: 1–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–8 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2–9 Install the Anchors: 1–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–3 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display 1–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4 Install Table Footswitch Assembly 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5 Position the Power Distribution Unit 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls 1–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–6–1 Gantry Base Covers 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7 Install Operator Console 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–7–1 Remove Front Cover 1–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–2 Attach Stabilizer Pads 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–3 Attach Keyboard Table Top 1–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–4 Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console 1–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–5 Monitor Placement 1–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7–6 Seismic Mounting 1–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



1–2

1–1 Install Table/Gantry Introduction

This chapter describes how to mount, position and level all HiSpeed AdvantageSubsystems.

Note: FIELD: Before you start the installation, make sure the site preparationcomplies with the Preinstallation manual.

If possible, remove the cable box(s) from the truck, first. Someone can then runthe cables per Chapter 2 of this manual, while others unload the subsystems fromthe truck and/or move them to the CT room.

1–1–1 Floor and Room Preparation

The support areas of the main table and gantry must rest on solid concrete, or otherbasic flooring. Resilient tile or carpeting may slowly yield over a period of time, anddisturb the alignment of the table to the gantry.

No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry, or the two interface areasbetween table and gantry, should be higher than the support areas for the table andgantry.

The floor structure must withstand the occupied weight of table and gantry, as wellas the individual contact area loading of these components

The method and placement of anchors, or through bolts, must not reduce thestructural strength of the floor.

Note: If you have to remove the gantry covers in order to move the gantry into theroom, the Appendix on page 1–24 describes the cover removal procedure.

1–1–2 Overview

The following procedure provides detailed instructions to position, level and anchor aHiSpeed Advantage gantry and table with a floor mounting system designed forinstallation without baseplates. HSA CT systems use adjustable leveling pads tosupport the gantry and table. The gantry has four leveling pads, and the table has fiveleveling pads.

First, use a room–layout template to determine the position of the gantry and table.Move the gantry into position, then position the table relative to the gantry, with threealignment bars. Finally, level and anchor the system.

Use the template to position the system; use the gantry and table to locate and drill theanchor holes. Drill the anchor holes with the system in place. Refer to Illustration 1–1and Illustration 1–2 for an example of this new procedure. This HSA system installationprocedure requires the items listed in section 1–1–4 and 1–1–5.



1–3

1–1–3 Pre–Installation Template

Locate the pre–installation template, in the cardboard tube attached to the consolewood support.

Use the room–layout paper template, P/N 2106475 (in two pieces), during siteplanning. The template shows the location of the gantry and table, along with therequired operating and service clearances. Although the template shows thelocations of the anchor holes (both primary and redundant) for floor structureconsiderations, use the templates to locate and drill the first gantry anchor holeONLY.

1–1–4 Installation Tool Kit

The installation personnel provide the installation tool kit, P/N 2110953. The took kitcontains the following special tools (See Illustration 1–1):

· Guide Pin Bolt , P/N 2106495: use to position the gantry over its first anchor hole.

· Long Alignment Bar (in two pieces), P/N 2106369: use to position the table,relative to the gantry.

· Two Short Alignment Bars , P/N 2106368: use to position the table, relative to the gantry.

· Adjuster Tool , P/N 2107863: use to turn the adjusters, which level the system.

· Drill Bushing , P/N 2106205: use to center and guide the bit when drilling theanchor holes.

· Vacuum Attachment (funnel) , P/N 2110944: use to vacuum debris out of theanchor holes.

· Spanner Wrench , P/N 2110003: if necessary, use to turn the adjusters afteryou anchor the system

1–1–5 Required Common Tools and Supplies

· Masking Tape · 9” torpedo level

· Extension Cord · 1/2” drive socket wrench

· Shop Vacuum Cleaner · 1/2” drive 3” long extension· Hammer drill · 1/2” drive 6” long extension

· 1/2” or 13mm masonry bit, min. 8” long · 9/16” socket

· Hammer · 3/4” deep well socket

· Large straight blade screwdriver · 11/8” socket

· 4 foot level · 11/2” socket

· 1/8” Allen wrench · 1/2” drive torque wrench: 0–100 N–m (0–100 ft–lbs)



1–4

1–2 Procedure to Install and Level Table/Gantry Without Floor Plates

1–2–1 Establish the Room Layout:

1. When you establish the room layout, make sure all the operating and serviceclearances shown on the templates exist. Locate the anchor holes, and makesure they clear structural interference in the floor.

Clean the area, remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates, andremove any old baseplates. Free the mounting surface of material, which mayinterfere with the positioning and leveling of the system.

2. Lay out the two paper templates.

a. Start with the Gantry template; if necessary, align it with any existing cable trough.

b. Tape the template to the floor.

c. Place the table template over top the Gantry template; align the scan andtable centerlines, and tape the table template to the floor.

Note: Before you drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: Make sure you havethe appropriate hospital personnel approve the location of thetable/gantry before you start to drill any anchor holes.

3. Anchor the front left corner of the gantry. (Location #1)

· If something in the floor, such as the position of reinforcement rods in theconcrete, interferes with this anchor hole position, shift the Gantry (andtemplates) to another location.

4. Drill one 13mm (1/2”) diameter, 110 mm (4 3/8”) deep, hole at the location shownon the gantry template.

· Important: Drill the hole perpendicular to the floor. While one person drillsthe hole, position a second person to watch the relationship between thedrill bit and floor. Make sure the bit remains absolutely perpendicular to thefloor throughout the drilling operation.

· Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris toprevent binding of the drill bit.

5. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole:

a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel.

b. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from thesurrounding area.



1–5

1–2–2 Position the Gantry:

1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the gantry.

2. Locate and remove the adjuster shipping bolt from the left front corner of thegantry base

3. Replace the adjuster shipping bolt with the guide pin bolt, which also threadsinto the leveling pad.

4. Wheel the Gantry over the template, and position the guide pin over the hole.

a. Locate the remaining leveling pads, and position them against the base ofthe gantry. (See Illustration 1–6)

b. Use the dollies to evenly lower the gantry, until the guide pin extends intothe hole, and the leveling pads rest approximately 3 mm above the floor.

c. If necessary, use the guide pin and hole as a pivot, and carefully rotate thegantry into its correct position over the templates.

5. Remove the paper templates from the floor, and discard.

6. Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before youlower the gantry to the floor.

· Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can “fine tune” theleveling pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.

7. Gently lower the gantry, until it rests on the floor.

8. Remove the dollies from the Gantry.

9. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster.

10. Remove the three remaining adjuster shipping bolts.

1–2–3 Level the Gantry:

1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the gantry.

2. Check the accuracy of the levels:

a. Place the level on a flat surface.

b. Observe the bubble’s specific location within the glass cylinder.

c. Rotate the level 180� (pivot on the center of the level, to maintain the samemounting surface) and check the bubble.

· Level Ok to use: If the bubble comes to rest in the same locationwithin the glass cylinder, you may use the level.

· Unacceptable Level: If the bubble comes to rest in a different locationwithin the glass cylinder, replace or adjust the level.

3. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings:

a. Place the screwdriver at an angle, in the slot of the lock ring.

b. Strike the screwdriver with a hammer, in the direction to loosen the lock ring.



1–6

4. Level the gantry:

a. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have toraise the gantry from its lowest possible height to level it.

· IF you positioned the gantry in a “valley” on the floor, you may have toraise the gantry to clear that depression, in order to correctly level thetable after you install it.

b. Systematically rotate through the three gantry level locations, Level LocationA, Level Location B, and Level Location C. (See Illustration 1–3 )

· Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time.

· Use a 9” torpedo level, and adjuster #1 and #2, to level Location A.

· Use a 4’ level, and adjuster #3 and #4, to level Location B.

· Use a 4’ level, and adjust #1/#2, and #3/#4 to level Location C.

· Each location has two machined extensions welded to the base, toaccommodate the 4’ level.

· Make sure the level sits flat on the machined portion of the extensions,without riding up onto the neighboring fillets or welds.

c. Adjust the gantry leveling pads until you center the bubble on all three LevelLocations at the same time.

· Use the adjusters to level the gantry.

· Use the adjuster tool, 11/8” socket and the 1/2” drive socket wrench toturn each adjuster.

· Use the mark on top of the adjuster to aid in incrementing the adjuster’srotation.

d. Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight. Toprevent a twisted base frame and/or rocking during normal operation, doNOT leave unloaded or floating adjusters.



1–7

1–2–4 Position the Table:

1. Remove all the transportation packaging, except dollies, from the table.

2. Wheel the table into its approximate position, relative to the gantry.

a. Locate the table leveling pads, and position them against the base of thegantry. (See Illustration 1–6)

b. Use the dollies to evenly lower the table, until the leveling pads restapproximately 3 mm above the floor.

3. Loosen adjuster shipping bolts and locking rings one turn before youlower the table to the floor.

· Loosen the locking rings and shipping bolts so you can “fine tune” theleveling pads to compensate for slight variations in the floor surface.

4. Remove the table left and right upper side covers.

5. Remove the four side panels; disconnect the ground straps at the z–channel.

6. Remove the table base cover center support bar.

7. Assemble two halves of the long alignment bar, #3:

a. Insert the pin, and rotate the handle to tighten the joint.

· If the joint remains loose, tighten the tip of the expanding pin toincrease its diameter, and try again.

b. Check the serial number on both halves of the alignment bar; make surethe serial number match.

8. The short alignment bars, #1 and #2, are identical and interchangeable.

9. Refer to Illustration 1–2:

a. Install the short alignment bars first.

b. Pivot the far end of the table until the long alignment bar fits into place.

c. Adjust the position of the table, until the three alignment bars fit into the 3/4”alignment holes in the gantry base, and the 1/2” alignment holes in the tablebase.

d. Fully seat all three bars on their mating surfaces.

10. After you install the alignment bars, lower the table to the floor, and remove thetransportation dollies.

a. Temporarily remove alignment bar #1, to remove the front table dolly.

b. Replace alignment bar #1 after you remove the front dolly.

11. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts, and loosen the lock rings.

CAUTION Take extreme care to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWAs.



1–8

1–2–5 Level the Table:

1. Remember: Wipe the leveling surfaces clean before you level the table.

2. Loosen and unload the Level Location #5 and Level Location #6 adjusters.

3. Use the 4’ level at all three table leveling locations.

· Place the level on the machined surfaces of the alignment bars.

· Do NOT rest the level on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3.

4. Because the leveling pads rest against the bottom of the base, you have toraise the table from its lowest possible height to level it.

5. Check the initial condition of all three Level Locations, and map out theadjustments needed to level the three locations.

6. Systematically rotate through the remaining level locations, Level Location D,Level Location E, and Level Location F. (See Illustration 1–3)

· Turn each adjuster a maximum of 1 turn at a time.

· Use adjuster #9 to level Location D.

· Use adjuster #8 to level Location E.

· Use adjuster #7 to level Location F.

7. Adjust the table leveling pads until you center the bubble on Level Locations D, E and F at the same time.

· Use the adjusters to level the table.

· Use the adjuster tool, 11/8” socket and 1/2” drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster.

· Use the mark on top of the adjuster to increment the adjuster rotation.

1–2–6 Tighten the Lock Rings:

1. Refer to Illustration 1–3. Recheck Level Locations, “A” through “F”.

· Use Location “G” to verify the table levelness.

· Make sure adjuster Location #1, #2, #3 and #4 all carry a portion of the gantry weight.

2. Screw down the adjusters at table Locations #5 and #6, until each rests tightlyagainst its leveling pad.

· Tighten each adjuster a little more than hand tight, but take care not tounload any of the other table adjusters.

3. Tighten the lock rings at Locations #1 through #7 with the hammer and screwdriver.



1–9

1–2–7 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes:

1. Remove the gantry scan window.

2. Prop open the top cover.

3. Open both front and rear gantry covers.

4. Use a piece of tape to mark the drill bit depth of 195 mm (711/16”) from the tip ofthe 13mm (1/2”) drill bit.

5. Use the 13mm (1/2”) bit to drill the remaining six anchor holes, Location #2through #7, with the system in place.

a. Place a piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWAs to preventdamage and dust contamination.

b. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit is even with the top of the drillbushing.

c. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster, to keep the hole vertical, andcentered, within the adjuster.

· Take special care to center the anchor holes in adjuster Location #5, #6and #7, to provide maximum lateral alignment capacity when youcenter the cradle on isocenter during subsequent system testing.

· Take care not to injure yourself on the gantry cover brackets.

· Take care to avoid the actuator motor lead when you drill the Location#7 Anchor hole. Remove the lead, if necessary.

d. Every 15 or 20 seconds, stop the drill, and clear the hole of debris toprevent binding of the drill bit.

6. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole:

a. Place the funnel tip inside the hole; place the vacuum hose in the funnel.

b. If you can, continue to vacuum while you drill, to keep gantry and table asfree of dust contamination as possible.

c. When you finish clearing the anchor hole, vacuum the debris from thesurrounding area.

d. Stop drilling frequently, to c

7. Do not drill anchor holes at Location #8 and #9. These locations help supportthe weight, but do not anchor the table into place.



1–10

1–2–8 Redundant Anchor Hole Locations:

If you cannot use one of the adjuster anchor holes, due to structural interference, suchas reinforcement bars in the concrete, use its redundant anchor location, shown inIllustration 1–4 .

Mark the 13mm (1/2”) drill bit with a piece of tape 170 mm (611/16”) from the tip of thebit, and follow the instructions in Section 1–2–7.

Note: The Gantry requires a minimum of four anchors, one in each corner.The Table requires a minimum of three anchors, one each at Location #5, #6 and #7.

1–2–9 Install the Anchors:

1. Use only Hilti Kwik–Bolt II anchors, 1/2” diameter by 8” long: P/N 2106573.

2. Remove the three alignment bars, and repack the install kit.

3. Refer to Illustration 1–5. Assemble the anchors before you install them:

a. Add a 1/4” thick washer under the regular anchor washer

b. Position the nut even with the first thread, as shown in Illustration 1–5.

4. Place an anchor in each hole.

· Refer to Illustration 1–5. Hammer the anchor downward, to completelyinsert the anchor in the hole.

5. Tighten the Location #1 through #7 anchors, and torque to 75 +/– 6 N–m (55 +/– 5 ft–lbs).

6. Replace all the table parts you removed during installation, including covers,ground straps and the center support bar.

7. Refer to Illustration 1–1. Remove the gantry shipping bolts and brackets.

8. Close all the Gantry covers, and re–install the scan window.

Note: If you cannot replace the lower table cover because the floor interferes,adjust all of the table and gantry levelers by 1/2 turn increments, to raisethe Table/Gantry until the lower table covers clear the floor. Return toSections 1–2–3, 1–2–5 and 1–2–6 to Level the Gantry/Table and Tightenthe Locking Rings.



1–11

ILLUSTRATION 1–1INSTALLATION HARDWARE



1–12

ILLUSTRATION 1–2LEVELING PAD AND ANCHOR LOCATIONS



1–13

ILLUSTRATION 1–3GANTRY/TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS

#8 #9

(Set level across shortalignment bars.)



1–14

ILLUSTRATION 1–4REDUNDANT ANCHOR LOCATIONS



1–15

ILLUSTRATION 1–5ANCHOR ASSEMBLY



1–16

ILLUSTRATION 1–6ADJUST LEVELING PAD

1–3 Assemble and Install the Gantry Display

1. Refer to display installation drawing, 46–297720, provided for reference, withevery system.

2. Route and connect the display cable, as shown on the drawing.

3. Attach the gantry display to the support arms.

· Firmly seat the display in the support arms.

4. Attach Gantry module, item 5, to the display assembly with four (item 8)1/4/x20 x .75 machine screws.

5. Connect the ground wire between the gantry display, and the screw in theunpainted area of front gantry shroud brace (directly under the cable hole onthe top of gantry shroud).

· Dress the ground wire to prevent interference with the rotating gantry structure.



1–17

1–4 Install Table Footswitch Assembly

Install the Table Footswitch Assembly, as shown in Illustration 1–7.

ILLUSTRATION 1–7INSTALL TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY

Table

Gantry

Table Footswitch assembly

29

_+14__16

1__16

” ”

Install Table Footswitch as-sembly mounting hardware10–32 black oxide screws s/c61221 (2)

(757.2 mm – 760.4 mm)

Locate the two plates at-tached to the table,46–297427P1. Install thebraided grounds from thegantry, under these plates,not to the ground buss on thefootswitch assembly.

1–5 Position the Power Distribution Unit

1. Roll the PDU into position on its permanently mounted casters.

2. Leave at least 15.5cm (6”) between the PDU and back wall, to allow cooling airto circulate.

3. Run the main input power conductors and ground through flexible metalconduit (attached between the PDU chassis and room ductwork) so you canmove the PDU away from the wall during service.

1–6 Install Gantry/Table Pushbutton Controls

1. Feed the 3 cables to the Gantry/Table pushbutton controls through the holes inthe front cover.

· Feed 2 cables through the left hole; feed one cable through the right hole.

2. Connect the 3 cables to the two Gantry/Table pushbutton control units.

3. Use the 8 screws and 8 lockwashers, provided, to install the two Gantry/Tablepushbutton control units to the front gantry shroud.

4. Ty–wrap cables to prevent interference with the gantry rotating structure.

DIRECTION 2152926-100REV 8 GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS

HISPEED CT/i GENERAL SER VICESYSTEM INSTALLA TION MANUAL

1-18

1-6–1 Gantry Base Covers-

1. Install the raceway pan, 46-297624P1, (lower portion of the rear racewayassembly, 46-297628G1) before you run any cables to the gantry.

a. Use the four sets of screws (46-170015P2) and washers (12-277) toattach the raceway pan to the rear of the gantry base, at the midway point.

b. If the site uses floor troughs, discard the raceway pan’s cover plate,46-297627P1

· See Chapter 10; Appendix 10A contains a base cover installation drawing.

2. Install the rest of the gantry base covers during Chapter 10, after you check theTable/Gantry alignment.

1-7 Install Operator Console

1-7-1 Remove Front Cover

1. Unlatch the two fasteners at the top corners of the front cover.

2. Rotate the fasteners counter–clockwise, to the 5 o’clock position.

ILLUSTRATION 1-8OPERATOR CONSOLE FRONT COVER

Un-latched Latched

RotateCounter-Clockwise to Un-latch

3. Unlatch the front cover, and slide the top edge forward 1/2 inch.

4. Lift the cover up, and away from the console.



1–19

1–7–2 Attach Stabilizer Pads

1. Attach the two pads to the console stabilizers before you remove the consoleshipping dollies. (Refer to illustration 1–9)

2. Screw the pads all the way into the legs

3. After you move the console into position, lower the pads until the console nolonger rocks forward.

ILLUSTRATION 1–9

CONSOLE STABILIZER PADS

1–7–3 Attach Keyboard Table Top

1. Older consoles are screwed into place. Use the four flat–head 1/4–20 X 3/8bolts to attach the keyboard table top to the support arms. See illustration 1–10.

2. “Some” new table tops will “snap” into place, allowing for easy removal andinstallation. See illustrtion 1–11

ILLUSTRATION 1–10

ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP

4 – 1/4–20 X 3/8 Flat Head



1–20

ILLUSTRATION 1–11ATTACH KEYBOARD TO TABLE TOP

Use spring loaded handles to attach keyboard top to support arms.

You may want to delay installing the top until the Octane computer is wired in Section2.



1–21

1–7–4 Attach Keyboard Table Top and Position Console

Refer to Illustration 1–12. The Console normally arrives with the bottom hole on theMonitor Top aligned with the fourth bolt from the bottom.

For optimum operator comfort, align the bottom hole of the Keyboard Table Top withthe third hole from the bottom, on the Console.

Your site may have different requirements, and you may have to adjust the Monitor Topand/or Keyboard Table Top up or down from this position.

· Use three people to move the very heavy Monitor Top.

· Always select a Table Top height that permits the operator to see the patient onthe table.

· Keep the one bolt–hole relationship between the Monitor Top and the KeyboardTable Top. Fasten the Keyboard Table Top one hole lower then the ConsoleTable Top, as shown in Illustration 1–12.

When you move the console into its final position, maintain a 5cm (2”) minimumdistance between the console and the wall.

ILLUSTRATION 1–12CONSOLE POSITION

Monitor Top: Start with the fourth holefrom the bottom. Spec 8 +/–1 foot pound

Keyboard Top: Start with the third holefrom the bottom. Spec 8 +/– 1 foot pound

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

2”

Wall Minimum

5cm



1-22

1-7-5 Monitor Placement

You may order a CT/i System with a Color Monitor and/or Black and White Monitorand/or Color Monitor with a Touch Screen. Illustration 1–13 shows the monitorplacement options.

ILLUSTRATION 1-13CONSOLE MONITOR PLACEMENT

Color or Black/WhiteMonitor



1–23

1–7–6 Seismic Mounting

If site specifications require seismic mounting, use 1/2” bolts to mount the brackets tothe floor. Refer to Illustration 1–14 for hole placement.

ILLUSTRATION 1–14SEISMIC MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS

FRONT

REAR

10.00”or25.4cm

14.00” or 35.56cm

3.29” or 8.36cm

44.00” or 111.76cm

Chapter 1 Complete



1–24

APPENDIX 1A STRIP DOWN GANTRY FOR RESTRICTED ACCESS

Strip Down Gantry for Restricted Access

Remove the Gantry cover to move it through a 99cm (39 inch) door.

1. Remove gantry shipping dollies, if attached.

2. Lift the top cover, and support it with the bracket.

3. Open the front cover:

a. Release the front cover’s top right strut.

b. Remove the front right side lock bolt

c. Carefully open the front cover.

WARNING THE FRONT COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 69KG (150 LBS). USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND WITHOUTDAMAGE.

1. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin. (Refer to Illustration 1–15 and Illustration 1–16)

2. Remove the upper and lower hinge pins, (lightly tap from the bottom)(Refer to Illustration 1–16)

3. Remove the front cover.

4. Lift the cover to clear the Gantry.

5. Carefully lay cover face down on a protected flat surface.



1–25

ILLUSTRATION 1–15GANTRY FRONT SHROUD HINGE

Detail A

Gantry Front Shroud Hinge

ILLUSTRATION 1–16HINGE PIN DETAIL

Detail A

Hinge Pin

Set Screw



1–26

Remove Rear Gantry Shroud1. Open the rear cover:

a. Remove the gantry top cover.

b. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover

c. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud.

d. Slide the top cover to the left, to remove the cover

2. Unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base by removing the four mounting bolts

3. Push the rear shroud back.

4. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins, on the upper right and leftsides of the shroud. (Refer to Illustration 1–17).

5. Lift up on the rear shroud to remove it from the gantry.

WARNING THE REAR COVER WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 55KG (120 LBS). USE AT LEAST 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE THE COVER SAFELY, AND PREVENTDAMAGE.

ILLUSTRATION 1–17REAR COVER HINGE PIN

Hinge Pin

Retaining Ring



2–1

CHAPTER 2 – INSTALL POWER, GROUND AND INTERCONNECT CABLES

Usage Note: CT Service Engineering constantly updates thismanual to match product improvements. Use the Installationbook that arrives with the system to install it. Any other revisionsof this manual may not exactly match this system installation.Use other revisions of this Installation manual for referencepurposes only.

CHAPTER 2 CONTENTS2–1 Introduction 2–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2 System Power and Ground Guidelines 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3 Electrical Inspection 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4 System Component Identification 2–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5 Cable Color Identifiers 2–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 Console Wiring 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–6–1 Console Power (Indigo Systems) 2–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–2 Console Power (Octane Systems) 2–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–3 Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems) 2–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–4 Computer Carrier (Octane Systems) 2–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–5 Central Data Box (Octane Systems) 2–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–6 Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only) 2–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–7 Back Bulkhead 2–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–8 Keyboard and Trackball Cables 2–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–9 Display Monitor, Color option 2–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6–10 RX Display Monitor 2–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–7 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections 2–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7–1 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections 2–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7–2 Non–EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections 2–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–8 Table and A7 Panel Connections 2–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections 2–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–9–1 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC Supply Output Connections 2–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–2 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections 2–21. . . . . . . . . . 2–9–3 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Circuit Breaker Panel 2–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–4 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Input Power Panel Connections 2–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9–5 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View) 2–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–10 System Ground Connections 2–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11 Contractor Connections 2–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



2–2

2–1 Introduction

Site use of conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a raised computer floor, as well as theindividual component layout determines the system cable sequence.

If you can unload the cable boxes off the truck first, try to run cables while others unloadthe subsystems from the truck and/or move them to the CT room.

· Try to run the system cables after the Contractor completes the Contractorsupplied wiring.

· All ground wires and other contractor wiring should be complete to the point ofequipment placement.

· If the site uses raceway, you may have to postpone some raceway work, such ascutting and fitting covers at equipment locations, until after you complete thecabling and position the equipment.

CAUTION Do not store excess cable in the bottom of the PDU. The 3–phase transformercan induce stray currents, and the cables restrict air flow, which could causethe 3–phase transformer and other PDU components to overheat.

When possible, store excess cable length in a serpentine configuration,approximately 1 meter long. (Do NOT coil excess cable.)

Some components have sufficient room for storage of excess cable lengths. In a fewinstances, you may have to provide separate cable storage, if the site doesn’t have acomputer floor.

ILLUSTRATION 2–1

EXCESS CABLE STORAGE CONFIGURATION

Ty–wraps

approximately 1 Meter

Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring.

· When you lay cables in a raceway, locate the signal cables in a separate sectionof the raceway.

Check all connection for tightness.

· Use suitable tools and judgment.

· Check all visible connections, especially ground connections.

Check for reasonable cable routing.

· Take into consideration necessary take–up distances for equipmentmaintenance, etc.

· Try to obtain as neat a job as possible.



2–3

2–2 System Power and Ground Guidelines

At this point, you MUST physically inspect the System Power and GroundConnections for the following:

· The system should have a dedicated ground. Make sure the ground wireoriginates at the supplying transformer, and has no secondary ground connectedto it, until it reaches the ground bar in our PDU.

· The system ground wire should be copper, and sized equal to, or larger than, the3 phase supply wires, with a minimum size of AWG 1/0. The ground wire shouldtake the same physical path (conduit) as the supply wires.

· The ground wire impedance from the system disconnect, including the groundrod, should not have an impedance greater than 2 ohms, to earth.

· Never bring the 480 volt system neutral into the PDU.

· Route all three phase wires, power cables, neutrals, and grounds in the sameconduit or raceway duct. Do NOT route these cables in the same conduit orraceway duct as the system control cables.

Check all the ground connections on the system for tightness and propertermination. Check the ground connection at the supply transformer. Check theground from the transformer to its earth connection.

2–3 Electrical Inspection

Arrange for electrical code inspection if required.

2–4 System Component Identification

TABLE 2–1SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFIERS

Designator System Component

CT2 Gantry

CT1 Patient Table

PM Power Distribution Unit

OC Operator Console(Console Computer)

WL X–Ray ON Warning Light

Identify all system cables by the system component designators listed in Table 2–1.Each end of a system cable has a label, and may have a color near the connector, (seeTable 2–2) to indicate the component, and the jack identifier of the component.



2–4

2–5 Cable Color Identifiers

The ends of the cables may be marked with a piece of blue, yellow, red or orange coloredtape, to help with the cable installation. Table 2–2 lists the subcomponent, andcorresponding color.

TABLE 2–2CABLE COLOR IDENTIFIERS

Subcomponent Color

Gantry Blue

Table Yellow

PDU Red

Console Computer Orange

TABLE 2–3JACK IDENTIFIERS (INDIGO CONSOLES)

J# Device J# Device

J1 Rx Monitor J9 Vieb [2]

J2 EMC Chassis [1] J10 DASM [2]

J3 Kieb [2] J11 Image Printer [2]

J4 Modem [2] J12 VCR [2]

J5 Video Splitter [2] J13 Remote Monitor [2]

J6 Printer [2] J14 Spare

J7 Display Monitor J15 Spare

J8 Spare J16 Computer Carrier [1]

TABLE 2–4JACK IDENTIFIERS (OCTANE CONSOLES)

P# Device P# Device

P1 Rx Monitor P9 VIEB]

P2 Tranciever P10 DASM

P3 KIEB P11 Image Printer

P4 VCR P12 Modem

P5 Printer P13 Remote Monitor

P6 Video Splitter P14 Spare

P7 Display Monitor P15 Central Data

P8 Ocatne Computer P16 EMC Chassis



2–5

2–6 Console Wiring

2–6–1 Console Power (Indigo Systems)

ILLUSTRATION 2–2POWER DETAIL (INDIGO SYSTEMS)

Front View

Notes:[1] Shown for reference, cable already installed.[2] Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable

Console Power2118139From: PDU A4J5

J1 J3 J5 J7

J10 J12 J14 J16

J2 J4 J6 J8

J9 J11 J13 J15

12

Indicates Cable Run Number



2-6

2-6-2 Console Power (Octane Systems)

ILLUSTRATION 2-3POWER DETAIL (OCTANE SYSTEMS)

Notes:� Shown for reference, cable already installed.� Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have

this cable

Console Power2118139From: PDU A4J5

J1 J3 J5 J7

J10 J12 J14 J16J2 J4 J6 J8

J9 J11 J13 J15

12


Front View

BIT3 [1]

VCR Video [2]

Specialix [1]

Rx Video2142221From: Rx Monitor

Notes:[1] Shown for reference, cable already installed.[2] Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable.[3] ÂThis cable is shipped in the bottom of the RCU cabinet.

Display Video2142221– Color or2143804 – B/WFrom: Display Monitor

Front View

J35 Audio In [1]

J33 Audio Out [1]

SCSI 1 [1]

Inter Suite [1]

Line Printer [1]

Inter Suite [1]

J41 Mouse:Route throughconsole top usinghole provided.

J42 Keyboard [1]

Camera SCSI 0 [1]

J45 Insite Modem [3]

J44 Security Key [1]

110 VAC [1]

1 3

5




2–7

2–6–3 Computer Carrier (Indigo Systems)

ILLUSTRATION 2–4COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL (INDIGO SYSTEMS)

Octane Console Front View



2–8

2–6–4 Computer Carrier (Octane Systems)

ILLUSTRATION 2–5COMPUTER CARRIER DETAIL (OCTANE SYSTEMS)



2–9

2–6–5 Central Data Box (Octane Systems)

ILLUSTRATION 2–6COMPUTER (OCTANE SYSTEMS) CENTRAL DATA BOX



2–10

2–6–6 Specialix option (Non Octane Systems Only)

ILLUSTRATION 2–7SPECIALIX DETAIL

Autovoice 2142512From: Gantry A1A5–J7

Touch 2139581 [2]

From: Rx Monitor

Front View

Laptop Tball Boot [1]

Notes:[1] Shown for reference, cable already installed.[2] Option: Shown for reference, system may or may not have this cable.

[1] [1]

7 2

SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1




2–11

2–6–7 Back Bulkhead

ILLUSTRATION 2–8BACK BULKHEAD DETAIL

Rear View

Keyboard 2139579From: Keyboard

DAS Data 2117848–2From: Gantry A1A5–J5

LAN 2118150From: Gantry A1A5–J3

Scan Abort 2118148 From: Gantry A1A5–J4

Intercom, Scan, E–Stop2139577From: Gantry A1A5–J1

4

8

9

10

11




2–12

2–6–8 Keyboard and Trackball Cables

Connect the Trackball and Keyboard cables, as shown in Illustration 2–9.

· Notice that the angled end of the keyboard cable connects to the keyboard, notthe straight end.

Do not connect the mouse to the keyboard.

· Route the mouse cable through the console top, and connect it directly to thecomputer carrier.

· The mouse is cable run 5.

ILLUSTRATION 2–9KEYBOARD/TRACKBALL DETAIL

Trackball

Keyboard Cable4

6




2–13

2–6–9 Display Monitor, Color option

ILLUSTRATION 2–10DISPLAY MONITOR DETAIL

DISPLAY MONITORCOLOR OPTION

R G B

2142221 VideoFrom: Computer Carrier Right Hand Video Plug

Rear View

Rx MonitorDisplay Monitor

110VACFrom: P7

3




2-14

2-6-10 RX Display Monitor

The Rx color monitor may also have a touch option.

ILLUSTRATION 2-11RX MONITOR DETAIL

Rear View

Rx MonitorDisplay Monitor

110VACFrom: P1

RX MONITOR

R G B

2142221 Video From: Computer CarrierLeft Hand Video Plug

2139581 Touch [1]

From: Specialix #2

Notes:[1] Option: Shown for reference; system may or may not have this cable.

2

1




2–15

2–7 Gantry Panels and Cable Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–12GANTRY

Gantry

A1 A5 panelDetail A

A1 TS 1Detail B

ILLUSTRATION 2–13A1A5 PANEL, DETAIL A

A1A5 Panel

J4

J3

J6

2139577

2118150

Detail A

Used for VX only (not used on RP or IG)

2118146

J1

J2

2118148

J5

2117848–2

(J6 does not existon an EMC gantry)EMC gantry has 4–position TS–1.(Terminal Strip 1.)

**

J7

2142512

8

15

7

11

10

9


Note: ** Take extreme care when you install the fiber optic DAS data cable. (Part#2117848–2). The DAS cable is fragile; do not step on it, kink or bend itsharply.



2–16

2–7–1 EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections

Note: An EMC system has a gantry with a 4–position TS1. (TS1 means terminalstrip 1.) A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1.

ILLUSTRATION 2–14EMC GANTRY – DETAIL B

1 2 3 4

21181452118143

2118142

A1 TS 1

Servo Amp Power

from PDUHV DC (550)from PDU

120V AC from PDU

AC LINE FILTER

Brown(Hot)

Blue (Neutral)

Green/Yellow(Ground)

16

13 14


Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 8–32 x .25 lg screws.



2–17

2–7–2 Non–EMC Gantry Power Cable Connections

Note: A non–EMC system gantry has a 12–position TS1. (TS1 means terminalstrip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

Install the TS1 terminal strip cover assembly with four 8–32 x .25 lg screws.

ILLUSTRATION 2–15NON–EMC – DETAIL B

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

46–327155G146–297080G1

2119603

A1 TS 1

Servo Amp Power from PDU

HV DC (550)from PDU

110V AC from PDU14 13

16




2–18

2–8 Table and A7 Panel Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–16HISPEED ADVANTAGE TABLE

A2A7 PANEL(DETAIL A: See Illustration 2–17)

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

Weldment Plate

etc board

ILLUSTRATION 2–17A2A7 PANEL – DETAIL A

J1 J3

FROM GANTRY FROM TILT MOTOR

A2A7 Panel

J2

FROM GANTRY

J6 J8J5J7

FROM FOOTSWITCH

FROM FOOTSWITCH

FROM GANTRY

2118141

17

Table Power from PDU




2–19

2–9 PDU 2133533 Cable Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–18PDU AREA LOCATIONS

TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back)A5 PANEL

SERVO AMPLIFIERASSEMBLYA1 PANEL

AC POWER DISTRIBUTIONA3 PANEL

HVDC SUPPLYA2 PANEL

PDU CONTROLBOARDA6 PANEL

INPUTPOWERA3 PANEL

OUTPUT CONNECTORSBULKHEADA4 PANEL



2–20

2–9–1 PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC Supply Output Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–19HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TS1–1 (Red)

TS2–1 (Black)

2118143 (for EMC Gantry)

Install Shield Clamp tightly around ex-posed Cable Shield at lower left ofPDU. (EMC Gantry only)

46–297080G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)

NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1(TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).

Ground

PDU 2133533 A2 Panel – HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

PDU 2133533

13




2–21

2–9–2 PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–20AXIAL SERVO AMP PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

TS1–2 (Red)

TS1–1 (Black)

Install Shield Clamp TightlyAround Exposed Cable Shield at LowerLeft of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)

PDU 2133533 A1 Panel – Axial Servo Amp Panel

2118145 (for EMC Gantry)

46–327155G1(for Non EMC Gantry)

TS1–3 (Shield)

PDU 2133533

14

NOTE: EMC gantry has 4–position TS1Non–EMC gantry has 12–position TS1(TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).




2–22

2–9–3 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Circuit Breaker Panel

ILLUSTRATION 2–21A3 PANEL

A3 Panel

CB1 Table 24 hrConsoleRelay control PWB

CB2 Tilt/elevation driveCradle

CB3 GPDU service outletTable service outlet

CB4 SCU

CB5 GantryDCRGS 120vac

PDU 2133533



2–23

2–9–4 PDU 2133533 A3 Panel – Input Power Panel Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–22INPUT POWER PANEL CONNECTIONS

A3 Panel

INPUT POWER PANEL

L1 L2 L3

L1 = Phase A from wallL2 = Phase B from wallL3 = Phase C from wall

(To wall ground)Ground

“Parking position” for “Neutral” wire, if present

TB1

PDU 2133533



2–24

2–9–5 PDU 2133533 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View)

ILLUSTRATION 2–23A4 PANEL (BOTTOM VIEW)

A4 PANEL – CONNECTOR BULKHEAD

Door Interlock

X–Ray Warning Light

Ground fromFootswitchGround Bar

A4 Panel Door Interlock & X–ray Warning Light

1 2 1 2

See next page for details to install X–RayWarning Light and Door Interlock.

J3

2118141

2119603 Non EMC2118142 EMC

2118139

2118146

J2

J5

J4

J6

NOT USED

PDU 2133533

HVDC Key-switch

N.C.

X

17

16

12

15




2–25

PDU 2133533 A4 Panel – Connector Bulkhead (Bottom View), continued

ILLUSTRATION 2–24X–RAY WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT

Door Interlock

X–Ray Warning Light Connections

Ground

Neutral

Hot

Hot

RoomX–Ray WarningLight

PDU A4 PANEL External Low Voltage(<30v) Power Source for X–rayWarning Light Relay Coil

X–Ray Warning Light Circuit

1 2 3 4

Note: Connect a door interlock to the system, to prevent X–Ray: remove thejumper from the door interlock connections on the PDU A4 panel, andconnect a normally open switch across them. The Interlock circuitprevents X–Ray when you open the scan room door.

Door Interlock

X–Ray Warn-ing Light

1 2 3 4

PDU A4 PANEL

NormallyOpen Switch

Door Interlock Circuit

1 2

1 2

Neutral

Neutral

External Pow-er source forWarning Light

Hot

Exter-nalRelay

OUT

IN



2–26

2–10 System Ground Connections

ILLUSTRATION 2–25SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS

20

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

��

# 2*Attach the1 inch braid to thetable with two metal plates,46–297427P1 .Position the braid undereach plate, and screw downthe plate with the two bolts.

CT1 RACEWAYGROUND BUS

DETAIL

� �

��

��

# 1/0

VAULTGROUND * use ground wire supplied with system for these grounds

��

��

# 2*

# 2*

#1/0*

ETC

1

SEE TABLE BELOWFOR CONNECTIONS

TABLE 2–5SYSTEM GROUND CONNECTIONS

AWG CONNECTION P.M.

# INSTALLED

Connection To Connection To

#1/0** EARTH GROUND PDU

#2 OC CT1 RACEWAY #10

#2 CT2 CT1 RACEWAY #9

#2 CT1 CT1 RACEWAY #8

#1/0 PM CT1 RACEWAY #11

GND Braid (2) CT1 CT2

** #1/0 is for field. Factory can use #4 for EARTH GROUND to PDU connection.



2–27

2–11 Contractor Connections

FIELD: Ring out all wires before connecting.

CONNECTIONORWALL BOX

AWG#CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO Installed

A1 #1#1#1

#1/0

Phase APhase BPhase C

GND

PM A3 TB1 L1A3 TB1 L2A3 TB1 L3

A3 TB1 GND(Do NOT connect anything to‘Neutral’ point.)

WL (Warning light) #12

#12#12

WL–0A (Blk) (From external lowvoltage (<30v) power source)Neutral (Wht) (From external powersource)PM–A4 WL Connection 3

PM–A4 WL Connection 4

Ground (From external powersource)

PM A4 WL Connection 1

PM A4 WL Connection 2

0A (Blk) (To External Warning LightRelay)Neutral (Wht) (To External WarningLight Relay)Ground (To warning light ground)

Door Interlock

– Room Door Interlock Connections PM A4 TS2 – 1,2

APPENDIX 2A

APPENDIX 2B APPENDIX 2C APPENDIX 2D APPENDIX 2E APPENDIX 2F APPENDIX 2G APPENDIX 2H APPENDIX 2I APPENDIX 2J APPENDIX 2K APPENDIX 2L APPENDIX 2M APPENDIX 2N

Chapter 2 Complete



2–28

ILLUSTRATION 2–26NON–EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

A1A5J3

A1A5J5

GANTRY [1]

CT2(BLUE)

A2A7–J1

A2A7–J2

A2A7–J3

A2A7–J7

A1A5J1

A2A7–J8

Table

Gantry

A2A7–J5

A1A5J2

A1A5J4

A1TS15, 6, 8

A1TS19, 10, 11

FIXED

A2 TS1–1TS2–1GND

A4 J4

A1 TS1–1TS1–2TS1–3

A4 J2

A4 J3

A4 J5

NON EMC HISPEED CT/i INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

A1TS11, 2, 3

2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop ❏ ❏

How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. ❏

2117848–2 DAS Data [2] ❏

2118150 LAN ❏ ❏

2118148 Scan Abort ❏ ❏

Connect to the FEP

Console

2142512 Autovoice ❏ ❏Specialix (SP) #5 A1A5

J7

2118139 Console Power❏

❏

NOTES:[1] Non–EMC gantry has a 12–position TS1.[2] Use extreme caution when installing the fiber optic

das data cable, part #2117848–2. It is fragile andshould not be stepped on, kinked or bent sharply.

[3] A variety of Monitors are available as options, seepages

[4] Option.

TABLECT1(YELLOW)

PDUPM(RED)

❏

MOUSE ❏

❏ Signal

❏ Tilt Motor Power

❏ LAN

❏ Tilt Limit Switch

❏ 2118141 Table Power

FIXED

FIXED

FIXED

FIXED❏ Footswitch

A2A7–J6 FIXED❏ Footswitch

Raceway

Footswitches

❏ HVDC Power ❏ 46–297080G1(550)

❏ Axial Motor ❏Power46–327155G1

❏ Signal ❏ 2118146

❏ 120VDC Power❏ 2119603

2139579 Keyboard ❏

PDU

Keyboard

BackBulkheadJ19

Back Bulkhead J18

Back Bulkhead J17

Power Panel

TrackBall [4]

❏

Back Bulkhead J20

Computer Carrier J41


12

11

10

9

8

7

6

4

5

13

14

15

16

17

❏

Display Monitor

❏

Rx Monitor

3

2

1 ❏

Specialx (SP) #2

2142221 Video ❏

2142221 Video ❏

2139581 Touch ❏

[4]

❏

Computer CarrierRight Video Head

Computer CarrierLeft Video Head

(ORANGE)

x



2–29

ILLUSTRATION 2–27EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

Gantry

A1A5J2

A1TS11, 2

A1TS13, 4

A2 TS1–1TS2–1

A4 J4

A1 TS1–1TS1–2

A4 J2

A4 J3

A4 J5

NOTES:[1] EMC gantry has a 4–position TS1.[2] Use extreme caution when installing the fiber optic

das data cable, part #2117848–2. It is fragile andshould not be stepped on, kinked or bent sharply.

[3] A variety of Monitors are available as options.[4] Option.

PDUPM(RED)

❏ HVDC Power ❏ 2118143 (550)

❏ Axial Motor ❏Power 2118145

❏ Signal ❏ 2118146

PDU

*

* Shields groundedwith clamp at PDUcabinet and gantry

base

*

EMC HISPEED CT/i INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

Line FilterTop: Blue

Bottom: BrownMiddle:Green/Yellow

*

*

A1A5J3

A1A5J5

GANTRY [1]

CT2(BLUE)

A2A7–J1

A2A7–J2

A2A7–J3

A2A7–J7

A1A5J1

A2A7–J8

Table

A2A7–J5

A1A5J4

FIXED

2139577 Intercom, Scan, E–Stop ❏ ❏

2117848–2 DAS Data [2] ❏

2118150 LAN ❏ ❏

2118148 Scan Abort ❏ ❏

Connect to the FEP

Console

2142512 Autovoice ❏ ❏Specialix (SP) #5 A1A5

J7

❏

TABLECT1(YELLOW)

❏

MOUSE ❏

❏ Signal

❏ Tilt Motor Power

❏ LAN

❏ Tilt Limit Switch

❏ 2118141 Table Power

FIXED

FIXED

FIXED

FIXED❏ Footswitch

A2A7–J6 FIXED❏ Footswitch

Raceway

Footswitches

2139579 Keyboard ❏

Keyboard

BackBulkheadJ19

Back Bulkhead J18

Back Bulkhead J17

Power Panel

TrackBall [4]

❏

Back Bulkhead J20

Computer Carrier J41


12

11

10

9

8

7

6

4

5

❏

Display Monitor

❏

Rx Monitor

3

2

1 ❏

Specialx (SP) #2

2142221 Video ❏

2142221 Video ❏

2139581 Touch ❏

[4]

❏

13

14

15

16

17

Computer CarrierRight Video Head

Computer CarrierLeft Video Head

(ORANGE)

How to use this page: Check box when cable end is installed. ❏✗

❏ 120VDC Power ❏ 2118142



2–30

ILLUSTRATION 2–28NON–EMC HISPEED CT/I INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

OCTANE SERIAL #2



2–31


OCTANE SERIAL #2



2–32

Page Left Intentionally Blank



2–33




2–34

TABLE 2–6CONSOLE (2169455) CABLES INTERCONNECT LIST (OCTANE SYSTEMS ONLY)

Cable Part # Cable Type “From” Connector “One End” “To” Connector “OtherEnd”

1 2139577 Beldon 9809 Gantry 37 pin Sub D Interconnect Bd. 37 pin Sub D

2 2139579 Keyboard Interconnect Bd.

3 2139589 Interconnect Bd. & Stealth Bd. 25 pin Sub D Side Bulkhead 25 pin Sub D

4 2191420 Multiple Cables Side Bulkhead Same as old cable Computer and Central Data Multiple Connectors

5 2139580 Alpha 2211 FEP Bd. 9 pin Sub D Rear Bulkhead 9 pin Sub D

6 2117848–2 Fiber Optic FEP Bd. Gantry / Rear Bulkhead

7 2124215–9 Vendor Cable Computer Bit 3 PCI Side Bulkhead

8 2118150 Coax Gantry Coax Rear Bulkhead Coax

9 2142512 Gantry Dynaplan Converter Cable

10 2191425 8 Conductor Computer RJ 45 Transceiver RJ 45

11 2206183 Computer Modem

12 2142221 Sony Cable SMF–400 Computer Left Monitor 15 Pin Sub D

13 2142221 Sony Cable SMF–400 Computer Right Touch Monitor 15 Pin Sub D

14 2110495–2 50 Conductor Round Cable DASM 50 Pin Centronics SCSI 1 Central Data 50 Pin SCSI–2

15 2205217 Beldon 9806 Central Data Port #3 RJ 45 Service Key 25 Pin Sub D

16 2191432 Round Cable Computer 68 Pin SCSI 3 Central Data 50 Pin SCSI–2

17 2205216 8 Conductor 4 Twisted pr. Madison Cable # Computer Serial 2 RJ 45 Dynaplan Cable to Gantry 9 Pin Sub D

18 2191434 Flat Ribbon Cable Side Bulkhead 50 Pin Sub D User Drive Assembly 50 Pin Dual Inline

19 2191435 Flat Ribbon Cable Stealth Bd. 50 Pin SCSI 2 Side Bulkhead 50 Pin Sub D

20 2191439 Round Cable Beldon YR40973 Central Data SCSI 50 Pin SCSI 2 Side Bulkhead 50 Pin Sub D

21 2124215–6 Side Bulkhead Bit 3VME

22 2191441 Beldon 9892 Transceiver 15 Pin Sub D Stealth Bd. 15 Pin Sub D

23 2118148 1 Twisted Pair Rear Bulkhead 9 pin Sub D Gantry 9 pin Sub D

24 2191442 Flat Ribbon Cable Hard Drive Assembly 50 Pin Sub D Hard Drives 50 Pin Dual Inline

25 2191443 Round Cable Side Bulkhead 50 Pin Sub D Hard Drive Assembly 50 Pin Sub D

26 2174129 Coax Cable Transceiver BNC Rear Bulkhead Panel Mount BNC



2–35




2–36

TABLE 2–7CONSOLE (2169455) POWER AND GROUND (OCTANE SYSTEMS ONLY)

Cable Part # Cable Type “From” Connector “One End” “To” Connector “Other End” Old Cable Number

27 2191444 Discrete 18 AWG Wires Power Supply AMP 1–480704–0 Intercom/Interconnect Bd.And VME Backplane

Terminals 2141471

28 2141469 Discrete 18 AWG Wires Power Supply VME Fans and User dr. Fan Same

29 2191450 Discrete 18 AWG Wires VME Cage Side Bulkhead None

30 2142224 AC Cable Power Supply Side Bulkhead Same

31 2142226 AC Cable Side Bulkhead Outlet Box Assembly Same

32 Vendor Supplied Modem Outlet Box Assembly None

33 Vendor Supplied AC Cable Right Monitor Outlet Box Assembly Same

34 Vendor Supplied AC Cable Left Monitor Outlet Box Assembly Same

35 2141463 Discrete 18 AWG Wires VME Cage +/– 5 and +12 User Drive Assembly Same

36 Vendor Supplied AC Cable Octane Computer Outlet Box Assembly None

37 Vendor Supplied AC Cable DASM Outlet Box Assembly Same

38 VendorSupplied AC Cable Central Data Serial Port Outlet Box Assembly None

39 2191455 Discrete 18 AWG Wires Side Bulkhead Hard Drive Assembly None

40 2191458 Discrete 18 AWG Wires Hard Drive Assembly Hard Drives None

41 2140513–16 Discrete 18 AWG Wire Outlet Box Assembly Ground Stud Same



3–1

CHAPTER 3 – SYSTEM CONTINUITY and GROUND CHECKS

CHAPTER 3 CONTENTS

Use Section 3–1 with non–EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.

3–1 Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–1 Introduction 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–1–1 Required Tools: 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–2 Site Ground Impedance Check (Non–EMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) 3–2. .

3–1–2–1 Ground Specifications 3–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–3 Site Ground Current Check (Non–EMC systems w/ PDU part #r 2133533) 3–3. . . .

3–1–3–1 Required Tools: 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1–3–2 Check Ground Current 3–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1–4 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (Non–EMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–4. 3–1–5 Site Ground Continuity Check (Non–EMC w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–5. . . .


3–2 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–1 Introduction 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–1–1 Required Tools: 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–2 Site Ground Impedance Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–6

3–2–2–1 Ground Specifications 3–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–3 Site Ground Current Check (EMC systems w/ PDU part number 2133533) 3–7. . . .

3–2–3–1 Required Tools: 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2–3–2 Check Ground Current 3–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–2–4 System Continuity & Gnd Checks (EMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) 3–8. . . . 3–2–5 Site Ground Continuity Check (EMC systems w/PDU part # 2133533) 3–9. . . . . . . .



3–2

3–1 Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533

Note: A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1. (TS1 meansterminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.

3–1–1 Introduction

Use Section 3–1 with non–EMC systems that have PDU part number 2133533.

Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connectionshave not shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections areintact.

3–1–1–1 Required Tools:

· DVM

· ECOS1023H Power Line–leakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46–194427P248

· Adapter Cables for Power Line–leakage Current Tester 46–194427P249

3–1–2 Site Ground Impedance Check(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

Use an ECOS1023–100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistancebetween the following list of components in the system. Verify the givenspecifications:

3–1–2–1 Ground Specifications

Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between:· PDU A4 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point

· Independent Console and Computer System ground point

· All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System groundpoint

Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between:· Vault Ground and PDU A4 Ground Bus

· PDU A4 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus

❏ Check box when complete.



3–3

3–1–3 Site Ground Current Check(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment poweredOFF, and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down.


· Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent

· Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 sizewire)

· Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)

3–1–3–2 Check Ground Current

1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position

2. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the following:

Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading,which is 123 milliamps

· A1 Panel System Ground ____.

(In theory, this measurement equals “0” however, you may measuresome current, <50 mA.)

If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground ConnectionIllustration in Chapter 2 of this Direction, to double–check the chassis groundruns.




3–4

3–1–4 System Continuity and Ground Checks(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)


1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following groundconnections:

FROM TO

Wall ground connection PDU cabinet

PDU A1 chassis PDU cabinet


2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover.

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay.

3. Use an ohmmeter to verify the presence of less than 1.0 ohm ofresistance between each of the following points:

FROM TO

PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Gantry A1 TS1–6 (+HVDC connection)

❏ Check box when complete

PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) Gantry A1 TS1–5 (HVDC RTN connection)


PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–9 ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–10 ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A4 K2–4T2 (bottom relay on A4 panel)

Gantry A1 TS1–3 (Hot) ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A4 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–2 (Neutral) ❏ Check box when complete


FROM TO

PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–1Gantry AC Ground


PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–8HVDC cable shield


PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1–11Axial cable shield




3–5

CAUTION Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers.

5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the followingpoints for shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between thefollowing points:

FROM TO

PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A2 TS2 (–HVDC) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry.

· Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until youcomplete the checks in the next section.


3–1–5 Site Ground Continuity Check(Non–EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)


1. Unplug all units.

2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, andmake sure you securely fastened all connections, at both ends.

Note: The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connectionsbetween system components. This procedure does not provide acomprehensive check of the quality of those connections.


FROM TO

PDU A3 Ground Bus Vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Operator Console ❏ Check box when complete

All Display or Computing Options Operator Console ❏ Check box when complete

Any room facility patient ground points PDU A4 Ground Bus ❏ Check box when complete




3–6

3–2 EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533

Note: A non–EMC system gantry contains a 12–position TS1. (TS1 meansterminal strip 1.) An EMC system gantry contains a 4–position TS1.



Use the continuity and ground checks to verify the system power connectionshave not shorted to ground, and that the ground and neutral connections areintact.


· DVM

· ECOS1023H Power Line–leakage Current Tester (60HZ) 46–194427P248

· Adapter Cables for Power Line–leakage Current Tester 46–194427P249

3–2–2 Site Ground Impedance Check(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)


Use an ECOS1023–100, or equivalent device, to measure the DC resistancebetween the following list of components in the system. Verify the givenspecifications:

3–2–2–1 Ground Specifications

Maximum DC resistance of 0.01 Ohm between:· PDU A4 Ground Bus and Computer System ground point

· Independent Console and Computer System ground point

· All other Display or Computing Options and Computer System groundpoint

Maximum DC resistance of 0.025 Ohm between:· Vault Ground and PDU A4 Ground Bus

· PDU A4 Ground Bus and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Table and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Gantry and Table/Gantry Raceway ground point

· Any room facility patient ground points and PDU A4 Ground Bus




3–7

3–2–3 Site Ground Current Check(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)

Measure the current on the System Ground in A1 with ALL equipment poweredOFF, and the A1 disconnect handle pulled down.



· Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 sizewire)

· Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe 46–194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)

3–2–3–2 Check Ground Current

1. Set meter range for AC Current 2M switch position

2. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the following:

Note: The Amp probes are 1000:1. The 2M range may give a 0.123 reading,which is 123 milliamps

· A1 Panel System Ground ____.

(In theory, this measurement equals “0” however, you may measuresome current, <50 mA.)

If you measure more than 50mA, use the System Ground ConnectionIllustration in Chapter 2 of this Direction to double–check the chassis groundruns.




3–8

3–2–4 System Continuity and Ground Checks(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)


1. Verify <1 ohm of resistance exists between the following groundconnections:

FROM TO

Wall ground connection PDU cabinet

PDU A1 chassis PDU cabinet


2. Remove the PDU A3 circuit breaker panel cover.

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock all power in the bay.


FROM TO

PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Gantry A1 TS1–1(+HVDC connection)


PDU A2 TS2 (HVDC RTN) Gantry A1 TS1–2(HVDC RTN connection)


PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–4 ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Gantry A1 TS1–3 ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A4 K2–4T2 (bottom relay on A4 panel)

Gantry A1 AC FilterBottom connection (Hot)


PDU A4 Ground Bus Gantry A1 AC FilterMiddle connection (Neutral)



FROM TO

PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 AC FilterTop connection (Ground)


PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1HVDC cable shield


PDU A3 Ground Bus Gantry A1 TS1Axial cable shield




3–9

CAUTION Turn OFF all PDU circuit breakers.

5. Set an ohmmeter to the lowest scale. Check between the followingpoints for shorts to ground. Verify no continuity exists between thefollowing points:

FROM TO

PDU A2 TS1 (+HVDC) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A2 TS2 (–HVDC) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–1 (–axial servo output) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A1 TS1–2 (+axial servo output) Bay vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

6. Replace the cover over terminal strip TS1, on the left side of the gantry.

· Leave the metal cover off the PDU A3 input power panel until youcomplete the checks in the next section.


3–2–5 Site Ground Continuity Check(EMC systems with PDU part number 2133533)


1. Unplug all units.

2. Review the System Ground Connection Illustration in Chapter 2, andmake sure you securely fastened all connections, at both ends.

Note: The next step verifies the presence of chassis ground connectionsbetween system components. This procedure does not provide acomprehensive check of the quality of those connections.


FROM TO

PDU A3 Ground Bus Vault ground ❏ Check box when complete

PDU A3 Ground Bus Table/Gantry raceway ground point ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Gantry ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Table ❏ Check box when complete

Table/Gantry raceway ground point Operator Console ❏ Check box when complete

All Display or Computing Options Operator Console ❏ Check box when complete

Any room facility patient ground points PDU A4 Ground Bus ❏ Check box when complete




3–10

NOTESChapter 3 Complete

APPENDIX 3A




4–1

CHAPTER 4 – PDU INTEGRATION

CHAPTER 4 CONTENTS4–1 Systems with PDU 2133533 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–1 Introduction 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–2 Required Tools 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–3 PDU 2133533 Area Designators 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–4–1 Circuit Breakers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–2 Relay Board 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–3 Power Switches 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–4 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–5 Covers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–5 Suite Emergency Stop Checks Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–6 Line Transformer Settings Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–6–1 Line Input Conditions: 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–7 System Power Up Systems with PDU 2133533 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–8 Gantry Display TestSystems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–9 Remaining Power Switches Systems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 Systems with PDU 2133533 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–1 Introduction 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–2 Required Tools 4–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–3 PDU 2133533 Area Designators 4–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–4–1 Circuit Breakers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–2 Relay Board 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–3 Power Switches 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–4 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only) 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–4–5 Covers 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–5 Suite Emergency Stop Checks – Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–6 Line Transformer Setting – Systems with PDU 2133533 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1–6–1 Line Input Conditions: 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–7 System Power Up – Systems with PDU 2133533 4–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–8 Gantry Display Test – Systems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1–9 Remaining Power Switches – Systems with PDU 2133533 4–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 Systems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION This procedure measures potentially hazardous voltages.


Use this procedure to check PDU voltages, test the suite Emergency–stop, andpower up the system.

4–1–2 Required Tools

· Multimeter with a rating of at least 1000 volts

· Multimeter leads with a rating of at least 1000 volts



4–2

4–1–3 PDU 2133533 Area DesignatorsILLUSTRATION 4–1PDU 2133533 AREA DESIGNATORS

TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back)A5 PANEL

SERVO AMPLIFIERASSEMBLYA1 PANEL

AC POWER DISTRIBUTIONA3 PANEL

HVDC SUPPLYA2 PANEL

PDU CONTROLBOARDA6 PANEL

INPUTPOWERA3 PANEL

OUTPUT CONNECTORSBULKHEADA4 PANEL



4–3

ILLUSTRATION 4–2PDU 2133533 TAP POSITIONS (REAR)

2 4 5 6 3

High VoltageTransformerA5 Panel

2 4 5 6 3 2 4 5 6 3

H3 H2 H1

Transformer Tapsand Jumpers

ILLUSTRATION 4–3PDU 2133533 CONTROL BOARD (A6 PANEL)

PDU Control Board A6 Panel

S1

Room Light Jumper

JP1

Man

HV

DC

Nor

mal

S2

HV

Tes

t

Nor

mal

A

B

X–Ray

Prep



4–4

4–1–4 Initial Configuration for Systems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION Turn OFF wall power; tag it and lock it off.

4–1–4–1 Circuit Breakers

Set all circuit breakers to OFF


4–1–4–2 Relay Board

1. Set SW1 and SW2 to the normal position.

2. Set the Room Light jumper (JP1) to meet hospital requirements.

· Position A enables the room warning light during X–Ray only.

· Position B enables the room warning light as soon as HVDC turns on. (See Illustration 4–3.)


4–1–4–3 Power Switches

1. Turn OFF all power switches on all sub–systems (gantry status display box,STC, DAS, table, console, computer, and SCU).


2. Set the HVDC Enable Key Switch (S1) to DISABLE.


4–1–4–4 Hardware and Connection Check (Field Only)

Use this step to check mechanical connections, and tighten anything that may haveshaken loose during shipment. Verify all hardware and connections in the PDU aresecurely fastened.


4–1–4–5 Covers

Install, or verify the presence of, all the lexan safety covers.




4–5

4–1–5 Suite Emergency Stop ChecksSystems with PDU 2133533

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power.

1. Turn wall power ON to the PDU.

2. Make sure the following green LEDs on the PDU Control board light:

· DS12 · DS19

· DS13 · DS20

· DS14 · DS21

· DS17 · DS22

3. Make sure none of the Red LEDs on the PDU Control light.

4. Press the suite emergency off button; verify it turns off wall power to the PDU.


4–1–6 Line Transformer SettingsSystems with PDU 2133533

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU TURNED OFF, TAGGED AND LOCKED THE MAIN WALLPOWER BEFORE YOU CHANGE TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER ATMAIN INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION.

TURN OFF WALL POWER TO CONNECT OR MOVE METER LEADS, OR TOREMOVE OR INSTALL COVERS.

4–1–6–1 Line Input Conditions:

1. Remove metal cover over right A3 panel.

2. Monitor the No Load Line to Line Voltage at A3 L1, L2, L3, during the workday.

· Do not record this data during “brown out” conditions.

3. Refer to Table 4–1. After you determine the nearest nominal line, verify the tapconnections match. Refer to Illustration 4–2 for tap locations.

4. Verify that the No Load Line to Line Voltage never falls outside the correspondingminimum and maximum values listed in the Table.

5. Use a 0–750 AC voltmeter of 3/4% accuracy to measure the line–to–line voltagesat A3 L1, L2, and L3.

· Verify the highest line–to–line voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the lowestvoltage.

· Example: IF the lowest voltage equals 474, the highest voltage should notexceed 474 x 1.02 = 483.5 volts.



4–6

TABLE 4–1PDU 2133533 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE

NO LOADLINE TO LINE

VOLTAGES

TAP CONNECTIONS

(All 3 phases must be same configuration)

NominalMaximum

Range (+/– 8%)

Phase AConnection

Phase BConnection

Phase CConnection

480V 442 to 518 3–4 3–4 3–4

460V 423 to 497 3–5 3–5 3–5

440V 405 to 475 3–6 3–6 3–6

420V 386 to 454 2–4 2–4 2–4

400V 368 to 432 2–5 2–5 2–5

380V 350 to 410 2–6 2–6 2–6

CAUTION Turn off, tag, and lock wall power.

6. Replace the metal cover over the right A3 panel.


4–1–7 System Power UpSystems with PDU 2133533

1. Turn OFF Wall Power.

2. Turn ON all PDU A3 circuit breakers.

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on wall power.

3. Turn ON wall power.




4–7

4–1–8 Gantry Display TestSystems with PDU 2133533

Watch the gantry display during its power–up self–test, and verify the tests completesuccessfully.

1. Turn ON switch S3 in the table (120vac 24hr power).

· The Gantry Display automatically runs its Power–Up Self–Test when you turnon the table 24hr power.

2. Verify the following Self–Tests run on the Gantry display:

a. Lights and digital displays light one at a time, in sequence.

b. Lights and digital displays flash several times, one at a time, in sequence.

c. Lights and digital displays flash several times at the same time.

d. Lights and digital displays remain on.


3. Turn ON the gantry “X–RAY/DRIVES PWR”.

· X–Ray/Drives power light changes from blinking to continuous on.


4. Turn ON the gantry 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box.

· Tube fans turn on.


4–1–9 Remaining Power SwitchesSystems with PDU 2133533

1. Turn ON the DAS power switch, located on the outside of the DAS power supplyassembly.

2. Turn ON the STC power switch, on the STC chassis.

3. Turn ON Table switches, S1 and S2.

4. Turn ON Console circuit breaker, CB1.


Chapter 4 Complete



4–8

NOTESAPPENDIX 4A




5–1

CHAPTER 5 – COMPUTER INTEGRATION

Usage Note: CT Service Engineering constantly updates this manual to match productimprovements. Use the Installation book that arrives with the system to install it. Anyother revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system installation. Use otherrevisions of this Installation manual for reference purposes only.CHAPTER 5 CONTENTS

5–1 Introduction 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2 Required Tools 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3 Requirements/Assumptions: 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4 Power Up ’ Stop for Maintenance 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5 Keyboard Configuration 5–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6 Non–English Keyboard Configuration 5–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–6–1 Start System ’ Stop the CT/i Auto–Start 5–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 Touch Calibration (Hardware Option) 5–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8 Monitor Set Up 5–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–8–1 Monitor Manual Use 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–2 Factory Pre–Set 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–3 Center the Raster 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–4 Set Monitor Color Temperature 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–5 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Set–up 5–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–6 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt. 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–7 Adjust Pincushion 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8–8 Adjust Convergence 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–9 Passwords 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9–1 Default Passwords 5–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–10 Set Time–zone and Time 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11 Change Tube 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–11–1 New Tube 5–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12 Reconfig 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–12–1 reconfig the OC 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12–2 reconfig the SBC 5–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–13 Restore System State 5–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14 Install Options – (Customer Purchased Option(s)) 5–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15 Verify Options 5–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16 Adjust Intercom Volume 5–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–16–1 Autovoice and CBT 5–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SET–UP TIPS “From Field Service Tips, Rev 9.” 5–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 5B touch screen defaults 5–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



5–2

5–1 Introduction

This chapter describes the RECONFIG, System State Restore, Options andMonitor Adjustment procedures. Use RECONFIG to enter/change site specificparameters on a HiSpeed CT/i System, with previously loaded operating system,platform and diagnostic software.

5–2 Required Tools

Service Desktop Applications

5–3 Requirements/Assumptions:

(1) All stations in a suite must have the same SUITE ID.

(2) You need the name of all hosts in the suite, and their correspondingInternet/Ethernet numbers.

(3) You need the Internet (IP) addresses the first time you execute a reconfig on the system.

· When you connect the system to a network, contact the hospital’s networksystem administrator to obtain an IP address for the suite.

· You also need to know the IP address for each gateway that will be used.

· You can use the default internet number on stand–alone systems.(stand–alone = not connected to any network)

CAUTION This procedure instructs you to REGEN DATABASE when you execute areconfig. REGEN the DATABASE during the initial installation, or Upgrade, ofa System. (The initial Installation or Upgrade assumes the disks do notcontain any Calibration Data.) The reconfig process, described in thefollowing procedure, destroys any existing system Calibration Data.

5–4 Power Up � Stop for Maintenance

1. Power up the RCU.

2. When the window appears ‘Starting up the system . . .’

Select Stop for Maintenance

5–5 Keyboard Configuration

The CT/i System can be used with 1 of 4 keyboards;

· English – US (default)

· German – DE

· Swedish – SE

· French – FR

The computer leaves the factory configured for the English – US keyboard. If your system is usingthat keyboard then continue with section 5–6–1.



5–3

5–6 Non–English Keyboard Configuration

A screen will pop up with several icons:

· Start System

· Install System Software

· Run Diagnostics

· Recover System

· Enter Command Monitor

· Select Keyboard Layout

1. Use the mouse and click on Select Keyboard Layout

2. Select the appropriate keyboard type. The currently supported keyboards are:

· o English – US (default)

· o German – DE

· o Swedish – SE

· o French – FR

3. Select ”Apply” to reconfigure.

5–6–1 Start System � Stop the CT/i Auto–Start

1. Select “Start System.”

2. Stop the CT/i Auto–Start by selecting Cancel when the pink attention

window appears.



5–4

5–7 Touch Calibration (Hardware Option)

If your system has the touch option, follow the instructions, below, to calibrate this feature.

1. In a ‘Unix Shell’ window, become root: su – root <Enter> (then enter thepassword)

2. Type: cd /usr/g/xtouch <Enter>

3. Type: setup

Note: The ‘Serial Device Name’ field should contain: /dev/ttya2

4. Click on |software calibrate|

5. Touch on the lower left corner.

6. Touch on the upper right corner.

7. Click on |save settings|

8. Click on |exit|

These settings will not take effect until the next time ctuser logs in. Continue with thefollowing steps to have the calibrations take effect.

9. In the ‘Unix Shell’ type: exit <Enter> to log out as root.

10. In the ‘Unix Shell’ type: sd <Enter>

Wait for the system to shutdown.

11. Re–Start the System.

12. Stop the CT/i Auto–Start by selecting Cancel when the pink attention

window appears.

Note: If the monitor touch screen does not work, go to Appendix B and verify the touch“Setup” menu contains the values in the table.



5–5

5–8 Monitor Set Up

This chapter describes the steps required to set up the two Display Monitors. The flowchart inIllustration 5–1 provides an overview of the Monitor Setup procedure. Use the detailed procedures inthe following sections to set up the monitors.

ILLUSTRATION 5–1MONITOR SETUP FLOWCHART

Start

Factory

End

Pre–Set

SetColor

Adjust Brightnessand Contrast

Adjust H/V Size,Center and Tilt

Adjust ConvergencePincushion



5–6

5–8–1 Monitor Manual Use

The following steps are the proper order to follow for adjustment. You will need to reference themonitor manual that arrived in the monitor box for specific control procedures.

5–8–2 Factory Pre–Set

1. Reference the monitor manual and reset all adjustments to factory preset levels.

5–8–3 Center the Raster

1. Reference the monitor manual and center the raster.

a. The monitors normally have a blank area to the left and right of the display,to maintain the correct aspect ratio.

5–8–4 Set Monitor Color Temperature

1. Reference the monitor manual and select the 6500K color temperature.

5–8–5 Monitor Brightness and Contrast Set–up

Color monitors have a lower light output than black and white monitors. Take care when you adjustthe monitor brightness & contrast on CT/i systems.

If the operators tell you they think the image on the monitor looks “softer” than the image on the film,and they like the film, adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast to compensate for its lower lightoutput. Use the following procedure to adjust the monitor Brightness and Contrast, until the operatorsees the anatomical structure (window width) at the expected window levels.

1. Adjust the ambient room light to the level used by the operator during image review.

2. Display the Image Works desktop.

3. Display the SMPTE pattern:

a. Use the browser to select Exam 1000, which contains the SMPTE pattern,and enlarge the image to full screen display.

–or– (if Exam 1000 does not appear in the browser)

b. Select the Service Desktop

c. Select |Trouble Shooting|

d. Select |Install SMPTE| (then repeat step a.)

4. Increase the Contrast to maximum.

5. Increase the Brightness to maximum.

6. Decrease the Brightness, until the raster just fades into, and matches, the monitor screenbackground.



5–7

5–8–6 Adjust the Raster Horizontal and Vertical Size and Tilt.

1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the horizontal, vertical raster size and tilt.

5–8–7 Adjust Pincushion

1. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the pincushion.

5–8–8 Adjust Convergence

1. Display the Service Desktop.

2. From the Service Toolbox, open a UNIX shell on the right–hand monitor.

3. Type confidence <enter> .

4. On the window that is displayed, select the |Monitor| icon.

5. Pull down the |Test| menu, and select |Start Testing| .

6. Select |Convergence| from the monitor menu, to display the convergence pattern on theright–hand display monitor.

7. Reference the monitor manual and adjust the convergence.

8. Select |Quit| from the monitor menu when done. Then pull down the |File| menu and select|Exit| , and finally type exit <enter> in the shell window.

9. To perform convergence adjustments on the left–hand (exam Rx) monitor, place the cursor inthe upper half of the left–hand monitor screen.

10. Press <Alt–F3> (simultaneously press the Alt and the F3 keys), to display the ServiceToolbox on the left–hand monitor screen.

11. From the Service Toolbox, open a UNIX shell on the left–hand monitor. Then perform steps3. through 8. of this procedure on the left–hand monitor.

5–9 Passwords

Note: Type the text shown in boldface , and press the <enter> key on thekeyboard. (Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter> .)

5–9–1 Default Passwords

Forward production HiSpeed CT/i systems have the following default passwords:

· root: #bigguy <enter>

· ctuser: 4$apps <enter>

GE changed these defaults in response to customer and field requests for tighter security, especiallyfor systems operating on networks. We suggest you change the default passwords ONLY bycustomer request. Then, contact your support center to report the new passwords.



5–8

5–10 Set Timezone and Time

1. Open a ”Unix Shell” OC window from tool chest, become root: su – <enter>(then enter the root password)

2. Type: reconfig [Enter].

3. Change the timezone selection on the System Settings screen to the correcttimezone for the location of the system. .

Note: If you cannot find an exact match for your timezone on the System Settingsscreen, select Universal, and enter the offset from GMT/UTC. In this case,automatic changes for daylight–saving time will not take effect.

4. [Accept] the reconfig (the system will re–boot)

5. Open a ”Unix Shell” OC window from tool chest, become root: su – <enter>(then enter the root password)

6. Enter the setdate command, type: setdate MMDDhhmmYYYY [Enter]MM is month (01–12), DD is day (01–31), hh is hour (00–23), mm is minutes(0–59), YYYY is the year.

· Example: For April 5, 4:24 pm, 1997 type: setdate 040516241997 The system responds with:Updating the time on the OC and SBC, Please wait...Current OC date: Sat Apr 5 14:24:01 CST 1997Current SBC date: Sat Apr 5 14:24:01 CST 1997setdate completed with NO ERRORS

7. Verify, as in the above example, that the time & date reported by both the OC &SBC are the same (+/– 3 sec.). If they are not, restart this procedure at step #1.

Note: When you turn off the computer, always check the date and time after yourestore power to the system.

8. Type exit <enter>

5–11 Change Tube

5–11–1 New Tube

newTu creates new tube usage files.

Initial Conditions:

· Ensure the SBC is booted.

· Applications must not be up.

1. Open a UNIX Shell, and type newTu <enter> .

2. Answer the questions.

Note: The ChangeTube software updates the applicable files on the OC and the SBCwith the information that you enter.



5–9

5–12 Reconfig

5–12–1 reconfig the OC

Note: When you reconfigure the OC, you MUST reconfig the SBC. The documentcollector box that arrived with your system, contains an OC/SBC SystemReconfiguration procedure, PN 2168070–100 for your reference.

1. Type/enter su – to change to root.

2. Type cd /usr/g/scripts <enter> .

3. Type reconfig <enter> to open the reconfig UIF.

4. Select config <enter> to open the reconfig UIF.

5. Select Regenerate Database? |Yes| on the first configuration screen, to erasethe former calibration information.

Note: For camera setup tips, see Appendix 5A .

6. Complete the remaining configuration screen data field selections. Refer to theOC/SBC System Reconfiguration procedure, PN 2168070–100 (located in thedocument collector box that arrived with your system), for illustrations of theConfiguration screens and explanations of the data fields.

7. When you finish all the configuration screen data parameters, select |Accept| atthe top of the screen.

8. Select |Yes| when the screen prompts you to re–boot now.

5–12–2 reconfig the SBC

1. Open a UNIX shell.

2. Type/enter cu sbc

If you do not get a prompt, press Enter a couple times.

Note: If this doesn’t work, try sending a break signal ~%b (ie: tilde percent b).

3. Login as root

4. Type/enter reconfig

Note: Wait for the SBC reconfig to complete. The software automatically re–boots thesbc when it completes the SBC reconfig.

5. Exit the cu session type ~ .

i.e.: to exit the cu session press the following keys: <tilde><dot><Enter>



5–10

5–13 Restore System State

Your system should have a system state MOD cartridge, located in the software collectorbox. The system state MOD contains:

· kV Test Baseline

· Z–Align Baseline

· Collimator Characterization

· Phantom Calibrations

The Installation process uses all the system state files. At this time, use the system stateMOD to restore the Phantom Calibrations and System Characterization files.

If you cannot locate an existing system state MOD, follow instructions later in thisInstallation Manual to manually Characterize the System and perform PhantomCalibrations.

1. Select |Service|

Service

2. Select |PM|

PM

3. Select |System State| to open the System State tool.

System State

START

PM

4. Insert the MOD cartridge in the Maxoptics� MOD drive.

5. Select |Charact| , |Cals| then |Restore| to restore the System Characterizationand Phantom Calibration files to the system.



5–11

5–14 Install Options – (Customer Purchased Option(s))

Your system may have one or more MOD cartridges that contain customer purchasedoptions. If your system has an options MOD(s), install it at this time.

1. Open a UNIX Shell and type installOptions <enter> .

· The Software Options tool opens.

2. Insert the options MOD into the Maxoptics� MOD drive. Make sure that theoptions MOD is NOT write protected, if this is the first installation of this option.

3. Select the options in the left–hand column to install the corresponding software.

4. Select |install|

Note: If your customer’s options include either the ConnectPro option or theDentascan option, please refer to the Option Installation Manual that camewith your option package for detailed instructions regarding special setupinstructions for that option. Or refer to the Load From Cold Manual (P/N 2168070–100).

A box may appear while the options are loading

When the option is displayed in the ”Installed Options” list, then installation ofthat option is complete. Note that some options take a fraction of a secondto install, while options like 3D may take a half a minute (due to the fact thatthey are installing software).

5. After all the options are installed, select Quit , then OK.

6. Remove the MOD & write protect the side with options. (Notice: The initialinstall requires the MOD to NOT be write protected; subsequent installs can bedone with the MOD write protected)

Note: If you have more than one options MOD, do NOT re–boot at this time,but continue as directed in the next steps. When you have completedinstalling all options, proceed to re–boot as directed in step 8.

7. If you have another option MOD to load, go back to step 1..

8. When you have completed loading all customer options, re–boot the system asdirected on the screen, to fully enable the options.



5–12

5–15 Verify Options

Use this section to verify you successfully installed the options during Section 5–14.Skip this section if you did NOT install customer purchased options on this system.

1. Select |Service|

Service

2. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

3. Select |Verify Options|

Computer Integration

Verify Options

START

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. When the shelltool opens, verify that it lists all the options you loaded during section 5–14.

5–16 Adjust Intercom Volume

Thumbwheel function:

a. To adjust the Gantry Speaker Volume: Adjust the leftmost volumethumbwheel while speaking into the Console Microphone.



5–13

b. To adjust the Console Speaker volume: Adjust the center volumethumbwheel while speaking into the Gantry Microphone.

5–16–1 Autovoice and CBT

Note: Locate the Audio Panel GUI in the upper left–hand corner of the DisplayMonitor. If you don’t see it, move the mouse pointer to the upper left–handcorner, and press <ALT – F3> to bring the GUI forward.

1. Click on the Audio Panel GUI icon to open it.

2. Select |Options| and |Output Sliders Independent| .

3. Set the Left Channel to HIGH to play autovoice to the table/gantry speaker.

4. Set the Right Channel 1/3 from the bottom, for playback to the console speaker.

Note: Set the Options every time you re–boot the system.

Chapter 5 Complete



5–14

APPENDIX 5A CAMERA SET–UP TIPSFrom Field Service Tips, rev 9.

CAMERA SETUP

LFC: During the Load from Cold procedure, the software leads you to the Hispeed CT/iSystem Configuration screen to setup your system defaults, preferences, and hardwaresettings. Select the configure |Hardware| button to set up the Camera & Filmingparameters.

1. Highlight all the available film formats.

2. Select the 4x3 format, or most often used film format, as your site default.

3. Select the correct (digital or analog) camera, and corresponding options.

Note: Digital camera films do not have gray scales.

4. Select SMOOTH or SHARP film quality. Important: Based on clinicalexperience, we recommend the following settings:

· Kodak: Smooth

· DuPont: Smooth

· 3M: Sharp

· Agfa: Sharp

If your site complains that the images on film are “too pixely,” change the film quality from“sharp” to “smooth.”

RECONFIG: Run reconfig to make sure the camera, parameters & defaults arecorrectly set for your site. If you follow steps 1 through 4, above, you can saveyourself a lot of headaches.

FILM QUALITY

All cameras on the market provide various tweeking “algorithms” to match the film imagequality to the display monitor image quality. Technologists & radiologists refuse tocompromise the film quality.

Top Priority: When the camera service vendor visits your site to setup the new CT/iport on the camera, please make sure the new films from the CT/i match the film qualityestablished by the technologists and radiologist.



5–15

GEMS CT/i ANALOG FILMING INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS (VIDEO & SERIAL)

Note: The ANALOG (VDB) video output specs and serial interface were specifiedfrom, and are the same as, the Genesis interface output specs. This doesNOT apply to the CT/i digital (LCAM) filming interface.

TABLE 5–1VIDEO OUTPUT (MEASURED INTO 75� AT BNC OUTPUT)

amplitude 1 volt peak–to–peak

video 0.643V +/–10%

setup 0.071V+/– 10%

sync 0.286V+/– 10%

DAC resolution 8 bits

diff. linearity +/–1 LSB max

glitch area 80 picovolt–seconds max, for any step size

rise/fall times > 10 nsec, 10%–90%

FS settling time 7.5 nsec typical to 1 LSB

transfer function guaranteed monotonic

noise level > 5.0 millivolt peak–to–peak, combined sync/async noise

DC offset +/–1VDC referenced to ground

TABLE 5–2PIXEL CLOCK OUTPUT

logic family F series TTL

output low level 0.8VDC max

output high level 2.0VDC min

output period 41.336 nsecs +/–10%

transition times 10 nsec max, 10%–90%



5–16

TABLE 5–3VIDEO TIMING CHARACTERISTIC

Video Timing Characteristic 60 HZ 50 HZ

pixel frequency 24.192 Mhz 24.192 Mhz

pixel period 41.336 nsec 41.336 nsec

horizontal line frequency 33.6 Khz 33.6 Khz

horizontal line width 720 pixels 720 pixels

horizontal active 544 pixels 544 pixels

horizontal blanking 176 pixels 176 pixels

horizontal front porch 26 pixels 26 pixels

horizontal sync 76 pixels 76 pixels

horizontal back porch 74 pixels 74 pixels

vertical frame frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz

vertical frame time 560 lines 672 lines

vertical active 524 lines 524 lines

vertical blanking 36 lines 148 lines

vertical sync 3 lines 3 lines

vertical back porch 30 lines 86 lines

vertical front porch 3 lines 59 lines

scanning format non–interlaced non–interlaced

TABLE 5–4VIDEO DISPLAY FORMAT

visible field 544 pixels by 524 lines

image field 512 pixels by 512 lines

grayscale field 32 pixels by 16 level grey bar on left side of image

grayscale software selectable on/off

grayscale off value 0 (black)

initial grayscale 255 (white) at upper left corner

border field 12 lines at bottom of visible field

border field value any 8–bit value, software programmable

TABLE 5–5HOST COMMUNICATIONS/CONTROL SERIAL PORT (ANALOG INTERFACE ONLY*)

interface RS422

25D conn pinout pin 8 (RX+), pin 21 (RX–), pin 9 (TX+), pin 22 (TX–), pin7 (GND)

baud rate 1200 baud

word length 8 bit, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit

parity even

type asynchronous

Note: * The CT/i digital DASM/LCAM serial control has standard RS232 on pins 2, 3, & 7.



5–17

TABLE 5–6CT/i DISPLAY MONITOR VIDEO CHARACTERISTICS & TIMING PARAMETERS

The following tables define the video signal timing for the CT/i image and operatordisplay video outputs. Both channels have 1280 x 1024 RGB color at 72HZ, 1 Voltpeak–to–peak video at 75 ohms.

Parameter 72 Hz Refresh

Active Pixel Format 1280 x 1024

Field/Frame non–interlaced

Refresh Rate 72.239 Hz

Pixel Clock Freq, Period 129.25 MHz, 7.737 ns

Horizontal Freq, Period 12.998 usec, 1680 pixels

Horizontal Active 9.903 usec, 1280 pixels

Horizontal Front Porch 0.232 usec, 30 pixels

Horizontal Sync 1.083 usec, 140 pixels

Horizontal Back Porch 1.780 usec, 230 pixels

Horizontal Blanking 3.095 usec, 400 pixels

Vertical Freq, Period 13.843 msec, 1065 lines

Vertical Active 13.310 msec, 1024 lines

Vertical Front Porch 38.99 usec, 3 lines

Vertical Sync 38.99 usec, 3 lines

Vertical Back Porch 454.93 usec, 35 lines

Vertical Blanking 532.92 usec, 41 lines

Equalization Pulses yes (@horiz rate)

Serration Pulses no

Note: If you connect anything to the monitor video, other than the display monitor,use good quality (low loss) 75 ohm video cables , and a high quality videosplitter (example: Black Box Corp. #RGBSplit–2). DO NOT use a BNC T connector; use a video splitter.

Video Output Video Level Sync Level Blanking Level

Red 0.714 Vp–p none 0.054 volts

Blue 0.714 Vp–p none 0.054 volts

Green 0.714 Vp–p 0.286 volts 0.054 volts



5–18

APPENDIX 5B TOUCH SCREEN DEFAULTS

Note: If the monitor touch screen does not work, verify the touch “Setup” menucontains the following values. If you select |Restore Defaults| during touch“Setup,” the touch screen will refuse to work until you restore the correct values,listed below.

Correct Touch Configuration default values:

· Jitter Control 8

· Press Threshold 5

· Release Threshold 3

· Mouse Button 1 Emulation Normal

· Mouse Button 2 Emulation Shift

· Mouse Button 3 Emulation Ctrl

· Serial Device Name /dev/ttya2

· Display Name :0.0

· Display Width Range Low 0High 1279

· Display Height Range Low 0High 1023

APPENDIX 5C APPENDIX 5D APPENDIX 5E APPENDIX 5F APPENDIX 5G APPENDIX 5H APPENDIX 5I APPENDIX 5J APPENDIX 5K APPENDIX 5L APPENDIX 5M APPENDIX 5N



6–1

CHAPTER 6 – TABLE/GANTRY INTEGRATION

Usage Note: CT Service Engineering constantly updates this manual to match productimprovements. Use the Installation book that arrives with the system to install it. Anyother revisions of this manual may not exactly match this system installation. Use otherrevisions of this Installation manual for reference purposes only.

CHAPTER 6 CONTENTS

6–1 Introduction 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2 Required Tools 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test 6–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch 6–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–5–1 Verify/Perform 6–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6 Collimator Characterization 6–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–6–1 Data Entry Hints 6–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6–2 Verify/Perform 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–7 Check Alignment Light Position 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–1 Internal Axial Lights 6–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7–3 Coronal Lights 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–8 Laser Warning Labels 6–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9 Alignment Light Visibility 6–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10 Intercom Check 6–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11 Tilt Characterization 6–12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12 Elevation Characterization 6–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13 Cradle Characterization 6–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14 Interference Test 6–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15 Emergency Stop Check 6–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 6A Axial Encoder Check 6–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 6B Axial Brake Check 6–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



6–2

6–1 Introduction

Use the Chapter 6 procedures to functionally check all parts of the table/gantrysubsystem, except the high voltage generator. (You check the HV Generator inChapter 7.)

Note: Record the data you collect from this chapter onto form F4879X, located inChapter 11 of this Installation Manual.


· Multimeter

· Scope (or Multimeter with Frequency Measurement Capability, such as theFLUKE 87.)

6–3 Axial Enable and Gantry Door Switch Test

1. Turn OFF the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.

· For the initial condition, do not leave the tube at the 6 o’clock position.

2. Close the Gantry front cover.

3. Clear the Gantry area for rotation.

4. Press the table alignment light pushbutton.

5. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.


6. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.


8. Verify that the Gantry rotates.



10. Open the front gantry shroud.

11. Manually rotate the gantry a few degrees from the current position.

12. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch on the gantry display box.


14. Verify that the Gantry did not rotate.



16. Close the Gantry front cover.



6–3

6–4 Verify the OBC CTVRC or HEMRC Control Board JP1 Jumper Position


2. Remove the OBC cover.

3. Locate jumper JP1, on the edge of the CTVRC Control board. (Second boardfrom the top, in the OBC.) If this system contains the optional Performix Tube,the board will be called the HEMRC Control Board, but will have a similar jumperconfiguration.

4. Systems with PDU part #2133533, place JP1 in the “NO DCRGS”, or ”B”position.

5. Replace the OBC cover.

6. Turn ON the axial drive enable switch.


6–5 Test HVDC (550) Enable Switch

1. Select |Service|

Service2. Select |TROUBLE SHOOT|

TROUBLESHOOT

3. Select |kV Loop|

kV Loop



6–4

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. On the High Voltage Functional Test screen that is displayed, change ”HVDC Bus Diff. Voltage” selection to ”Normal”, and change ”Test Duration” to 10seconds.

6. Verify all personnel have cleared the system, before you enable the HVDC (550).

7. Verify the following:

a. PDU key switch enabled

b. HVDC (550) enable switch on gantry status display box ON

c. “HVDC (550) ENABLE ON light” on the gantry status display box ON.

8. Select |Run|· If the system asks for a diagnostic download at this time, answer |YES|, and

wait 90 seconds.

· Press the (Start Scan) button when prompted and it flashes, to begin thetest.

9. Verify the “HVDC (550) BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED LIGHT” on the gantrystatus display box turns ON.

10. When the test finishes, verify the system displays the following message alongthe bottom of the High Voltage Functional Test screen: Diagnostics havecompleted with zero errors reported.



6–5

6–5–1 Verify/Perform

1. Turn off the HVDC (550) enable switch on the gantry status display box.

2. Select |RUN| to run the test again.

3. Verify the system displays the following message along the bottom of the HighVoltage Functional Test screen: Test has aborted due to an error. See errorlog for more information.’

4. Verify the message log contains the following error: Gentry I/O backup contactorerror. Backup contactor pilot relay failed to energize on command. Relay K251and K245 are energized. Check PDU and Gentry I/O.

5. Select |File| , |Exit|

6. Select |System Resets|

7. Select |RUN|

8. Wait 90 seconds for the message “Scanning Hardware Reset Successful.” toappear on the screen




6–6

6–6 Collimator Characterization


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

2. Select |START|

3. Select |Characterization|

. . . START. . .

Table/Gantry Installation

Dismiss

HV DC Enable Switch

Characterization

– – – –

Power Supply Checks

Collimator

Rotor Verification



6-7

4. Select |Collimator Data|

Mechanical Characterization Tool

File Help

Cradle

Hardware

TableEleva-tion

Tilt

Collimator

CharactLimits

ViewValues

ViewLog

Characterize

Data View

6-6-1 Data Entry Hints

Use the following method to quickly change the information in a Graphical UserInterface (GUI) data field. You can use this method in any GUI that requires anupdate to existing information in a data field.

1. Highlight the current text in the field:

a. Press and hold the left mouse button.

b. Drag the cursor across the data to highlight it.

2. Press the [Backspace] key to clear the field.

3. Type the new data into the field, and press [Enter].

Reset

Data



6–8

6–6–2 Verify/Perform

1. Verify, or type/enter, the collimator characterization values:

· If you loaded the System State MOD during Chapter 6, verify the collimatorcharacterization values on the Mechanical Characterization Tool screenmatch the values on the collimator characterization label.

–or–

· If you did not load System State MOD, type/enter the characterization valueslisted on the collimator characterization label.

2. Select |Continue|

3. If you entered new values, watch for the message which states thecharacterization successfully completed.


6–7 Check Alignment Light Position

CAUTION Verify all personnel have cleared the system. The Gantry rotates to 180degrees during this check.

1. Press the alignment light button on the Gantry mounted controls, to position thegantry and turn on the lights.

2. Press the alignment light button on the Gantry mounted controls, again, to turnthe lights off.

3. Turn OFF the axial drive enable and HVDC (550) enable switches on the gantrystatus display box.

4. Use the switch on the gantry control assembly, located near the collimator, tomanually turn on the alignment lights.

· Access the switch through the opening in the center of the gantry, betweenthe front and back shrouds.

WARNING NEVER STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS WHEN YOU OPERATETHE ALIGNMENT LIGHTS. STARING INTO THE BEAMS CAN CAUSEPERMANENT EYE DAMAGE.


6–7–1 Internal Axial Lights

1. Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light.

2. Verify that the two lines line up on each other.

Note: GE designed the internal axial lasers on the HiSpeed Advantagesystem to shine “down” on the collimator. Do NOT adjust the internalalignment lights at this time. The tomographic plane tests use the QAphantom, in Chapter 11, to check the internal axial lasers alignment tothe collimator.




6–9

6–7–2 External Axial to Internal Axial Distance

1. Raise the table to its highest elevation.

2. Extend the cradle until you see both the internal and external laser lights shiningon the cradle.

3. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle, and measure the distancefrom the internal axial laser line to the external axial line.

· Verify this distance equals 310.0 mm +/– 1.0 mm.

4. Place the rule on the left edge of the cradle, and measure again.

5. Leave the cradle in its current position, and lower the table to the minimumelevation.

6. Measure the distance between the internal and external lights on both edges ofthe cradle, as above.

· Verify the distance remains equal to 310.0 mm +/– 1.0 mm.


6–7–3 Coronal Lights

1. Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening, in frontof the coronal laser light.

· Verify the two coronal lines coincide.

2. Move the paper to the right side of the patient opening.

· Verify the two coronal lines coincide.

3. Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening.

· Use a level to verify that the coronal lines are horizontal.


6–8 Laser Warning Labels

1. Refer to Illustration 6–1.

2. Make sure the outside of the gantry labels are in the proper locations.

3. Obtain and install replacements for any missing labels.



6-10

ILLUSTRATION 6-1LASER WARNING AND PRECAUTIONS

LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

670 MM LASER DIODE1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM OUTPUT

CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION

LASER APERTUREDO-NOT-STARE

INTO BEAM

Note: The laser assemblies, inside the gantry, havethree laser radiation warning labels attacheddirectly to the assemblies, or their power inputs.

LASER RADIA TIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

Note: This label varies slightly forthe 635nm laser.

4. Close the front cover of the gantry.




6–11

6–9 Alignment Light Visibility

HHS requirements state that any light used to define the tomographic plane must bevisible under ambient light conditions, up to 500 lux.

1. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level.

· Do not add localized spot lights to increase the brightness level.

2. Raise the table to its highest position, advance the cradle into the gantry, andturn on the alignment lights.

3. Use your hand to check laser visibility:

a. Center the back of your hand over the cradle, and position it over the table,until the external axial alignment light shines on it.

b. Make sure you can see the axial alignment light, it doesn’t matter whether ornot you see the sagittal or coronal lights.

4. Use the back of your hand to check the internal axial alignment light visibility.

5. If you cannot see the external or internal axial lights on the back of your hand inambient light conditions:

a. Obtain a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter.

b. Measure the ambient light intensity at the cradle surface, in the external andinternal alignment light locations.

Note: Footcandles x 10.76=lux.

· If the light reading(s) exceed 500 lux, reduce the room lighting to 500 lux andrepeat Step 3. and Step 4.

–or–

· If the light meter readings equal 500 lux or less, replace the laser light(s)and/or their power supplies.


6–10 Intercom Check

Make sure the intercom talk and listen functions work.




6–12

6–11 Tilt Characterization

1. Select |Tilt|

2. Follow the Tilt Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.



File Help

Cradle

Hard-wareReset

TableEleva-tion

Collima-torDataCharactLimits

ViewValues

ViewLog

Characterize

Data View

Tilt



6–13

6–12 Elevation Characterization

1. Remove upper right and lower right table covers.

2. Locate the small L–shaped measurement block, stored on top of the biggermeasurement block.

a. Remove the small L–shaped measurement block from its storage position.

b. Install it in its characterization position, at the right rear of the table.

c. Move the measurement plate, on the right side of table, to the “out” position.

d. Tighten the mounting screws for both plates.

3. Select |Table Elevation|

4. Follow the Elevation Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.

· Important: Take care to measure the exact elevation distances. Incorrectmeasurement will result in Elevation Characterization failure.


File Help

Cradle

Hard-wareReset


ViewValues

ViewLog

Characterize

Data View

Tilt

TableEleva-tion



6-14

Note: Refer to Illustration 6–2. Measure the elevation distance as vertically aspossible. Measure between the bottom surface of the each measurementblock and the center of the rear leg upper pivot pin.

5. Return the measurement plates to the storage position.

ILLUSTRATION 6-2MEASURE ELEVATION DISTANCE

Bottom Side

Weldment Plate

Lower Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rearleg’s upper pivot pin to the bottom of the rear measurement bloc k.

Rear leg upper pivot pin

UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36.44 INCHES (925.6MM)

LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.7 INCHES (373.4MM)

Center Line

Weldment Plate

Center Line

Rear leg upper pivot pin

Bottom Side

Upper Position Distance: Measure between the center line of the rearleg’s upper pivot pin to the bottom of the right side measuremen tblock.




6-15

6-13 Cradle Characterization

1. Select |Cradle|


File Help

HardwareReset

CollimatorData

CharactLimits

ViewValues

ViewLog

Characterize

Data View

Tilt

TableElevation

Cradle

2. Follow the Cradle Characterization instructions displayed on the screen.

IMPORTANT METAL FREE CRADLE CHARACTERIZA TION INFORMATION:

The following changes apply to the on–screen directions for alignment light andend–of–cradle position characterization steps, for tables equipped with theMETAL-FREE cradle only .

a. In the alignment light procedure (3rd and 4th screens), use the BLACK DOT onthe cradle right–side bumper, instead of the black stripe, for both steps.

Note: Elevate the table to at least 40mm from isocenter, so the black dot reachesthe external scan plane alignment light before the cradle reaches its homeposition.

b. In the end-of-cradle position procedure (5th screen), use the same BLACKDOT on the cradle right–side bumper, instead of the end of the cradle.



6–16

ILLUSTRATION 6–3CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION PIN LOCATIONS

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀetc board

CT38886A

Cradle CharacterizationPin Storage Location(Under Front Cover)

Cradle Characterization PinFront Characterization Loca-tion

Gantry

Cradle Characterization Pin Rear Characterization Loca-tion




6–17

6–14 Interference Test

Reset the hardware to download the new characterization values to the ETC, OBC, andSTC, before proceeding to the table/gantry interference test on this page.

Note: If the following elevation and/or tilt display readings fail to meetspecifications, DO NOT adjust the limit switches. Instead, recharacterizeelevation and/or tilt.

1. Select |Hardware Reset|

Note: Press only the “fast” pushbutton to display the elevation limits for the presentelevation/tilt combination.

2. Move the cradle to the home position:

a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table to the minimum height.

b. Make sure the elevation display reads 577.5 +/– 3 mm.

c. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table to the maximum height.

d. Make sure the elevation display reads 25.5 +/– 3 mm.


File Help


ViewValues

ViewLog

Characterize

Data View

Tilt

TableEleva-tionCradle

Hard-wareReset



6–18

Note: Minus (–) tilt means the top of the gantry tilts away from the table.Plus (+) tilt means the top of the gantry tilts toward the table.

3. Advance the cradle about 36 inches from the home position.

a. Tilt the gantry to –23 degrees.

b. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops.

c. Make sure the elevation display reads 119.5 +/– 3 mm.

d. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch.

4. Tilt the gantry to –20 degrees.

a. Use the Down pushbutton to lower the table until it automatically stops.

b. Make sure the elevation display reads 209.5 +/–3 mm.

c. Make sure the table clears the gantry covers by at least 1/2 inch.

5. Use the Up pushbutton to raise the table until the elevation display readsbetween 119.5mm and 209.5mm.

a. Tilt the gantry to –10 degrees.

b. Tilt the gantry away from the table; make sure it stops at –22.0 +/–0 degrees.

c. Tilt the gantry toward the table; make sure it stops at +18.5 +/–0 degrees.

6. Return the cradle to home position.

a. Make sure you can tilt the gantry to +/–30.0 degrees.

b. Leave gantry tilted to –30 degrees for now.

7. Raise the table until you can move the cradle.

8. Advance the cradle about 12 inches from the home position.

a. Use the Home Button to return the cradle to the home position, tilt thegantry to 0 degrees, and lower the table to minimum height.

b. Make sure you cannot move the cradle at table heights below 209.5 +/–3mm.

c. Maker the cradle Lock indicator lights on the gantry display.

9. Select |File, Exit|

10. Select |Dismiss|

11. Select |Cleanup|




6–19

6–15 Emergency Stop Check

1. Use the table pushbuttons to advance the cradle about 2 feet from the home position.

2. Press one of the X–RAY DRIVES POWER OFF (Red) buttons on the gantry.

3. Make sure the X–RAY DRIVES POWER shuts off, and the white button flashes.

4. Depress one of the table elevation buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabledtable elevation.

5. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons, to verify the emergency stop disabledthe cradle drive.

6. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.

7. Press the other X–RAY DRIVES POWER OFF button on the gantry.

a. Make sure the X–RAY DRIVES POWER shuts off.

b. Manually move the cradle to the home position to make sure the cradleclutch released.

c. Make sure the cradle latches securely in the home position.

8. Press one of the flashing white buttons turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.

9. Press one of the four table tape switches to make sure the X–RAY DRIVESPOWER shuts off.

a. Turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.

b. Repeat with the three remaining table tape switches.

10. Press the console emergency stop switch, and make sure the X–RAY DRIVESPOWER shuts off.

11. Turn on X–RAY DRIVES POWER.


Chapter 6 Complete



6–20

APPENDIX 6A AXIAL ENCODER CHECK

Axial Encoder Check1. Turn the Gantry by hand, until it passes through the home flag.

2. Make sure the following LEDs toggle:

a. DS270(CHA) and DS271(CHB) AX bd LEDs toggle.

b. DS320(CHC) toggles on and off once during the time the DS321(home flag)remains lit.

APPENDIX 6B AXIAL BRAKE CHECK

Axial Brake Check1. Toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box, and listen to the

brake energize and de–energize.

Note: If you reset the hardware since you turned on Gantry AC power, the brakemay not toggle. If you don’t hear the brake toggle, use the 120vac enableswitch on the gantry status display box to turn gantry 120vac power off, thenon. Now, you should hear the brake energize and de–energize when youtoggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box.

2. Verify the following conditions:

a. When you turn off the axial drive enable switch, the switch pilot lightextinguishes and the brake de–energizes.

b. Make sure you can easily rotate the Gantry by hand.

c. When you turn on the axial drive enable switch, the switch pilot light turns on,and the brake energizes.

3. Turn on all three switches on the gantry status display box.APPENDIX 6C APPENDIX 6D APPENDIX 6E APPENDIX 6F APPENDIX 6G APPENDIX 6H APPENDIX 6I APPENDIX 6J APPENDIX 6K APPENDIX 6L APPENDIX 6M APPENDIX 6N



7–1

CHAPTER 7 – DAS INTEGRATION


CHAPTER 7 CONTENTS

7–1 Introduction 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1–1 Failure Protocol 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1–2 Special Handling Precautions 7–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1–2–1 Antistatic Handling 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1–2–2 Cleanliness 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1–3 Required Tools 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2 Verify X–Ray 7–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–2–1 X–Ray Verification Analysis 7–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2–2 Advanced Features – Channel, View and Box Reporting 7–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–3 Check System Microphonics 7–6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 7A HP–DAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS 7–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7–1 Introduction

7–1–1 Failure Protocol

Follow standard troubleshooting protocol to verify all failures.

· Move boards, remove or move flexes, and repeat the test.

· Record all Board and flex moves on the DAS Board/flex tracking sheet.

· When you verify a failure, mark the defective part (attach a summary of thesymptoms this failure caused, and how you determined this was the bad part), andremove it from the system.

After you swap boards or install new boards, allow about 30–40 minutes of warm–uptime before you trust any test results. You can run DAS Quiz during warm–up time toexercise the DAS.

If you encounter failures in any section, restart the procedure at the DASQUIZoffsets and noise.

7–1–2 Special Handling Precautions

DAS circuit cards are more sensitive to both STATIC DAMAGE and DIRT than any othercircuit cards we now use.

Please read sections 7–1–2–1 and 7–1–2–2, and observe the following precautions.



7–2

7–1–2–1 Antistatic Handling

You MUST wear a grounding wrist strap anytime you remove boards from the DASor a conductive bag. NEVER place the DAS boards on non–conductive surfaces,such as white bench tops, Table cradle, plastic covered books or non–conductiveplastic bags.

7–1–2–2 Cleanliness

Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards andcauses the DAS to fail the drift spec. Wear white cotton gloves when you handle the DASboards, because fingerprints on the board can cause problems during humid conditions.Use only clean new gloves.

CAUTION NEVER USE AN ERASER TO CLEAN ANY PART OF THE DAS.

7–1–3 Required Tools

· Ground Wrist Strap and Anti–Static Bags

7–2 Verify X–Ray

This section uses X–Ray to test the DAS for opens, lows and shorts.

System Configuration:

· Flex cables ON

· All covers ON

· Nothing in detector FOV

4. Select |SERVICE|

Service5. Select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



7–3

6. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection|

Diagnostic Data Collection

7. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

8. Display the |Protocol Name| selection menu.

9. Select the X–Ray Verification protocol (xrayverif ) by clicking on the protocolname, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.

10. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:

· STATIC X–RAY ON · CALIBRATION VECTOR NONE

· 1 SECOND SCAN · 10 mm APERTURE

· 1 SCAN · AIR FILTER

· 2 SECOND ISD · SPOT SIZE SMALL

· 80 kV · OFFSET CORRECT

· 40 mA 1:1 COMPRESSION FACTOR

11. Select |ACCEPT RX| ,

12. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes.

13. Select |Dismiss| to close the DDC window.

14. Display the |System Integration| menu.

15. Select |Scan Analysis|



7–4

7–2–1 X–Ray Verification Analysis

1. Select the recently completed scan from the List Selection browser.

2. Select Means andSt Devs

· Two plots appear; Means on the top, and Standard Deviation on the bottom.

· Position the cursor over a channel (with no mouse buttons depressed) todisplay the corresponding the channel and data value.

ILLUSTRATION 7–1DISPLAY CHANNEL AND DATA VALUE

Channel Data

3. Verify no low or shorted channels exist.

Note: Advanced plotting techniques are shown on the following page.

4. To close the plot:

a. Move the mouse cursor inside the plot.

b. Double–click the right mouse button.

OR

c. Select |Dismiss| to close the Scan List Select window.

d. Press the <ALT F3> keys to bring the window forward, if necessary.

e. Select |Dismiss|




7–5

7–2–2 Advanced Features – Channel, View and Box Reporting

Analyze and Manipulate the plotted data:

ILLUSTRATION 7–2ANALYSIS SOFTKEYS

Click here for Auto–Scale.

Click here to expand the plot.

Click here to shrink the plot.

Click here to move the plot up.Click here to move the plot down.

reset

1. Use the softkeys, displayed on the right side of the plot, to manipulate the graphdata.

2. Move the cursor inside the plot to report channel data.

3. To close the plot:

a. Move the mouse cursor inside the plot.

b. Double–click the right mouse button.



7–6

7–3 Check System Microphonics

Use this test to check the DAS for rotational noise, which could cause streaks orrings in images.

1. Power ON the DAS at least 2 hours before you run this test.

2. System Configuration:

· OBC cover ON

· FLEX cables ON

· DAS covers ON

· Power supply covers ON

· Heater controller ON

3. Select |TROUBLE SHOOT|

4. Select |DAS Tools| .

DAS Tools

Troubleshoot

Dismiss



7–7

5. Select |AUTO TEST|

DAS Tools

MANUAL

TEST

SCAN

ONLY

TEST

POP

NOISE

TEST

MICROPHONICS

TEST

AUXILIARY

CHANNEL

TEST

DAS

ARCHITECTURE

VIEW

LOG

VIEW

SPECIFICATIONS

DISMISS

AUTO

TEST

6. Select |ACCEPT|to run all of the DAS tests.

This Test Takes Approximately 30 minutes.



7–8

DAS Tools

MANUAL

TEST

SCAN

ONLY

TEST

POP

NOISE

TEST

MICROPHONICS

TEST

AUXILIARY

CHANNEL

TEST

DAS

ARCHITECTURE

VIEW

LOG

VIEW

SPECIFICATIONS

DISMISS

AUTO

TEST

NUMBEROFPASSES

REMAIN-INGPASSES

TOTALSUC-CESSES

TOTALFAIL-URES

PAR-ALLELLINKDC NOISE

DC OFFSETS

ANALOG ABSOLUTE

ANALOGDIFFLINEARITYOFFSETDRIFT

AUX-ILIARYCHAN-NELSDIGITALTESTPATTERNPOP NOISE

MICROPHONICS

NUMBER OF REPETITIONS FOR GROUP

DELAY BETWEEN GROUPS (mSecs)

# TEST FAILURES BEFORE STOPPING

REMAINING

ACCEPT

STOP

TESTS

0

5

5

1

1

1

1

1

30

30

0

5

5

1

1

1

1

1

30

30

1

200

128

1

128

7. Press the (Start Scan) button when it lights, to initiate the first scan.

· The system auto–scans the remainder of the tests.

8. Observe the “Total Successes” and “Total Failures” columns.

· The columns update with each pass of each test.

9. If the “Total Failures” column lists any failures, troubleshoot before proceeding.



7–9

Note: You cannot edit the Auto Test screen. While troubleshooting, you may runindividual tests by selecting their name ( i.e. pop/noise, microphonics, auxchannels ). You may also select MANUAL TEST, and enter the number oftest iterations, and select such options as limits, rotor on/off, etc.


Chapter 7 Complete



7–10

APPENDIX 7A HP–DAS OFFSET AND NOISE SPECIFICATIONS

DC Offsets

With zero current input into all channels, the mean value of each output for HP–DASmust be 4096 +/– 765 counts on single detector cell channels, and 4096 +/– 790 ondouble and triple detector cell channels.

NoiseTABLE 7–1SPECIFICATION LIMITS FOR DC OFFSETS AND NOISE

HP–DAS DC OFFSETS NOISE

CHANNEL RANGE OFFSET COUNTS (MEANS) NOISE COUNTS

1 – 1 4096 + 790 1.5 – 3.00

2 – 64 4096 + 790 1.5 – 2.70

65 – 688 4096 + 765 1.5 – 2.25

689 – 747 4096 + 790 1.5 – 2.70

748 – 752 4096+ 790 1.5 – 2.70




8–1

CHAPTER 8 – GENERATOR CALIBRATION


CHAPTER 8 CONTENTS

8–1 Introduction 8–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2 Required Tools 8–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3 Safety Precautions 8–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4 mA Meter Check 8–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5 New Tube Seed Shift 8–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors 8–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–6–1 Install HV Divider 8–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–2 Setup Instrumentation 8–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–3 Calibrate the Cathode 8–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6–4 Calibrate the Anode 8–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–7 Measure Total kV 8–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8 Verify kV Meter 8–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–8–1 Remove the external HV Divider: 8–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9 Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check 8–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10 KV Rise and Fall Times 8–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–10–1 Measure Rise Time 8–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10–2 Measure Fall Time 8–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–11 Verify Internal Scan Timer 8–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks 8–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 8A Tube Usage 8–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8B Tube heat Soak and Seasoning 8–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 8C Verify ma and kv 8–35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



8–2

8–1 Introduction

Follow this procedure to check HV Generation Sub–system, including the Anode andCathode HV Tanks, the Tube, and the mA and kV control boards. The flowchart inIllustration 8–1 provides a graphic overview of the HV Generation subsystem test.

ILLUSTRATION 8–1CHAPTER FLOWCHART

End

Site Ground Leakage Current Check

mA Meter CheckNew Tube Seed Shift** skip if system tape provided

Auto mA CalX–Ray ON Light ChecksRise & Fall TimeVerify Internal Scan Timer

Start

Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors.Total kV MeasurementkV Meter Verification



8–3


· System Software

· DVM

· Bleeder

· Scope Probe–to–bleeder Cable 46–219921G1 (If available) to minimize ripple onbleeder waveform

–or–

· Use 30 feet of Belden #8422 cable (stock code 06762)

· 6 Feet Ground Wire (AWG12 MINIMUM)

· Scope

· GND Wrist Strap

· Spanner Wrench

· Torque Wrench

· Spanner Adapter

· Torque Wrench Adapter

· 1/2 Socket

· HV Divider–to–scope Test Cable

· (2) 10 ft. High Voltage Cables, 3 Wire

· KVp Evaluation Tool, PN 2108232, located in an envelope attached to theoutside of the Software Collector Box.

IMPORTANT:

· YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORMF4879X, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK.

· LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARECOLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTEDAT THE SITE.



8–4

8–3 Safety Precautions

DANGER NEVER PLACE ANY PART OF YOUR BODY INTO THE GANTRY WITHOUTDISABLING THE AXIAL DRIVE AND VERIFYING THAT IT IS DISABLED. BOTHOF THE AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS MUST BE OUT. DO NOT SERVICE THEGANTRY IF EITHER LED IS ON. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAYRESULT IN PERSONAL HARM, HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH. BE SURETHAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGESAFETY GUIDELINE MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46–018308 SAFETY VIDEOTAPE PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY

ILLUSTRATION 8–2AXIAL DRIVE STATUS AND CONTROL PANEL

CT3529A

AXIAL LOOPCONTACTORCLOSED

550 BACKUPCONTACTORCLOSED

GANTRY 120VACCONTACTORCLOSED

AXIAL DRIVEENABLEON

550VDCENABLEON

GANTRY 120VACENABLEON

OFF OFF OFF

CAUTION: DISABLES TUBE COOLING

AXIAL DRIVE

AXIAL DRIVEENABLE SWITCH

STATUS LEDS

GANTRY STATUSDISPLAY PANEL



8–5

8–4 mA Meter Check

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

3. Select |mA Meter Check|

mA Meter Check

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. Select |Accept| to begin the test, after the time delay expires.

· Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds.

· Record the displayed Cathode and Anode mA values on FORM F4879X(located in CHAPTER 11), in the “Circuit ON” section of the mA Meter Checktable.

· The “Circuit ON” values of the cathode and anode sides should readapproximately 15 – 25 mA.

6. Select |Dismiss| when you have completed recording the values.



8–6




8–7

8–5 New Tube Seed Shift

Note: If a system state MOD arrived with the gantry, skip the New Tube Seed Shiftcalibration.

Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube, and set the calseedvalues on a new system.1. Select |SERVICE|

Service2. Select |Replacement Procedures|

REPLACE-MENTPROCE-DURES

3. Select |Install New Tube|

Install New Tube

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. The screen prompts you to confirm the displayed tube type.

6. Verify the installed and configured tube types match.

7. Press (Start Scan) when it illuminates, to automatically run the filament currentseed shift program.

· ABORT the program after the filament current seed shift scans, and beforeductility warm–up




8–8

8–6 Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors

8–6–1 Install HV Divider

1. Switch off “X–Ray and Drives” power on the gantry.

2. Inside the Gantry:

a. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable.

b. Switch OFF the axial drive.

c. Rotate the Tube to the 3 o’clock position

d. Pin the Gantry.

e. Switch OFF the 120vac Gantry power.

f. Refer to Illustration 8–3. Install the HV Divider between Tube and Tanks.

Note: Place the HV Divider on a table or tube hoist, so the cables reach the tube.

3. Refer to Illustration 8–3. Add a ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) fromTube ground to Bleeder ground.

4. Switch ON the 120vac Gantry power.

5. Switch ON the HVDC (550) enable.

6. Switch ON “X–Ray and Drives” power on the gantry.

7. Reset the hardware.

ILLUSTRATION 8–3BLEEDER INSTALLATION

CATHODE

ANODE

GRN

10’ H.V.CABLES

C1515ADIVIDER

CATHODECABLE TOGANTRY

ANODECABLE TOGANTRY

��

��

�

�

�

GROUND WIRE

TUBE



8–9

8–6–2 Setup Instrumentation

Use an oscilloscope* with 10X probes:

1. Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider.

· Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.

2. Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider.

· Connect the scope ground to bleeder ground.

Note: In order to minimize bleeder–induced ripple on the KV waveform, connect a30 foot Belden shielded twisted pair cable between the scope probes and thebleeder. Refer to the Required Tools list, on page 8–3, for a more completedescription of this cable.

3. Trigger channel one, positive, DC couple, trigger mode normal.

4. Channel one and two, 10v/div, time base 200ms.

5. Invert Channel two.

*If possible, try to plug the scope into the table 120vac outlet, to reduce the noise on thescope waveforms. Use an extension cord if necessary.

Note: Determine the type of kV board in the OBC.This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321064G1–D kVboard without brackets.This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321198G1 or2143147 kV board in [brackets].

8–6–3 Calibrate the Cathode

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



8–10



4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


6. Select the X–Ray Verification protocol (bleedersetup ) by clicking on the protocolname, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.


· STATIC X–RAY ON

· 1 SECOND

· 1 SCAN

· FOCAL SPOT LARGE

· 100 KV

· 50 MA

· MONITOR ENABLE

8. Select |ACCEPT RX|

The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV equals 50 +/– 0.5 kV.

Note: If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left VerticalCursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the RightVertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform.



8–11

9. Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the CathodekV, and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log, fall within+/– 0.5kV of each other.

10. Use the pot, labeled CA [CAKV, R316], on the kV board, to adjust the scope reading.

· CCW decreases the scope kV.

· CW increases the scope kV.

· 1/2 turn equals approximately 0.5 kV.

11. Record the results on FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11).

8–6–4 Calibrate the Anode

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



4. Select |START|





· 1 SECOND



8–12

. . . START. . .

· 1 SCAN

· FOCAL SPOT LARGE

· 100 KV

· 50 MA

· MONITOR ENABLE


The Computer Displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV equals 50 +/– 0.5 kV.

9. If you use scope cursors to window the trace, position the Left Vertical Cursor tothe Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform. Position the Right Vertical Cursorto the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform.

10. Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board, until the scope reading for the Anode kV,and the displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log, fall within+/–0.5kV of each other.

11. Use the pot, labeled AN [ANKV, R318], on the kV board, to adjust the scope reading.

· CCW decreases the scope kV.

· CW increases the scope kV

· 1/2 turn is approximately 0.5 kV.

12. Record the results on FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11).

13. Display the Generator Characterization menu.

14. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, so the message log no longer displayskV and mA readings.




8–13

8–7 Measure Total kV

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .





8–14



· 1 SECOND

· 1 SCAN

· FOCAL SPOT LARGE

· 100 KV

· 50 MA

· MONITOR ENABLE

8. Change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch.2, to read total kV from the HV divider.

9. Channel one and two, 20v/div, time base 200ms, trigger ch. one, positive.


11. Record the scope reading, and the Avg. kV displayed in the message log, in FORM F4879X (located in CHAPTER 11).


13. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, so the message log no longer displayskV and mA readings.


8–8 Verify kV Meter

Use this procedure to verify the calibration of the internal kV metering circuits.

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

3. Select |mA Meter Check|

4. Select |Accept|

· The test begins after the time delay expires.



8–15

· Once the test begins, the software enables the meter circuit for 4 seconds.

5. Record the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV and Total kV values in the FORMF4879X (located in CHAPTER 11) ”kV Meter Verification” “Circuit OFF” and“Circuit ON” table.

6. Select |Dismiss|


8–8–1 Remove the external HV Divider:

1. Switch OFF “X–Ray and Drives” power on the gantry.

· Press the “Emergency OFF button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls.

–or–

· Press “X–Ray and Drives OFF” on the REM box.

2. Refer to Illustration 8–2 on page 8–4. Inside the Gantry:

a. Switch OFF the HVDC (550) enable.

b. Switch OFF the 120 Vac Gantry power.

c. Remove the HV Divider between the Tube and Tanks (Illustration 8–3).

d. Reconnect the HV cables for normal operation.

CAUTION Incorrect installation of anode and cathode HV cables can destroy thePerformix tube!

e. Re–apply paper toweling around tube locking ring to absorb excess oil.

f. Un–pin the gantry.

g. Restore the OBC cover (to retain OBC boards during rotation.)

h. Switch on the 120 Vac gantry power.

i. Switch ON the the 550v enable.

j. Switch ON the Axial Drive enable.

3. Switch ON “X–Ray and Drives.”

· Press the “Reset” button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls.

–or–

· Press “X–Ray and Drives ON” on the REM box.

4. Reset the hardware.



8–16

8–9 Auto mA Cal/X–Ray On Light Check

Use this procedure to verify and complete Auto mA Cal on the system.

If you have just run a Heat Soak and Seasoning, wait 30 minutes before you run the Auto mA Cal.

Note: The system automatically warms up the tube.


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

2. Select |Auto mA Cal|

Auto mA Cal

System Integration

START


4. During this test, verify the X–Ray on indicators, located on the gantry display andthe rear gantry shroud, illuminate when X–Ray is on.

5. Record the data on FORM F4879X. (located in CHAPTER 11).

Note: If the system cannot complete the Auto mA Cal because HV aborts, follow theHeat Soak and Seasoning procedure in Appendix 8B , on page 8–29.




8–17

8–10 KV Rise and Fall Times

Note: Determine the type of kV board in the OBC.This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321064G1–D kV boardwithout brackets.This procedure lists the names of components on the 46–321198G1 or 2143147 kVboard in [brackets].

1. In the OBC, connect a scope to the KV board.

· Channel 1: Exposure Command EXCM, TP22 [TP5].Scope ground to LGND, TP6 [TP3].2v/div

· Channel 2: Total kV KVTB, TP30 [TP11]. (At this test point KV = 20KV per volt.)Scope ground to AGND TP39 [SGND, TP12].1v/div

2. Set the Scope Time base to 200 usec.

· Positive or Negative trigger as required.

3. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION





8–18

6. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


8. Select the X–Ray Verification protocol (Rise Fall (DDC)) by clicking on theprotocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.

TABLE 8–1KV RISE AND FALL TIME RECORD TABLE

Technique Rise Fall

kV mA Record Delay ms Limit Record Delay ms Limit

80 400 0 +1.9 ms Test not required! N/A

140 40 Test not required! N/A –0 +0.5 ms

Note: See pages 8–19 and 8–20 for measurement clarification.

8–10–1 Measure Rise Time

1. Refer to Table 8–1. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:


· 1 SECOND

· FOCAL SPOT LARGE

· 80 KV

· 400 MA

Note: Measure rise time only on the the 80kV/400mA scan.

2. Select |Accept Rx|

3. Select |Pause| after the start of scan, to prevent the scope from displaying thefall time.

4. After you record the rise time, select the |Resume| to initiate the fall time scan.

5. Record the delay between the rise of the EXCM signal, and the 75% thresholdcrossing of the selected kV (on FORM F4879X – located in CHAPTER 11).

· Do not include the waveform overshoot.

· The 75% point for 80kV equals 60kV

Note: Refer to page 8–19 for measurement clarification.



8–19


ILLUSTRATION 8–4RISE TIME MEASUREMENT

75% OFSELECTEDTECHNIC

RISETIME

RISE TIME EXAMPLE80kV/400mA

Ch.1

TP 22EXCM[TP5]

Ch.2 TP 30KVTB[TP11] 0% XRAY

Names of compo-nents on the46–321198G1 or2143147 kV boardare shown on thispage in [brackets].

Note: The 75% point for:80kV equals 60kV100kV equals 75kV120kV equals 90kV140kV equals 105kV



8–20

8–10–2 Measure Fall Time

1. Refer to Table 8–1. Verify/Set–up the following DDC parameters:


· 1 SECOND

· FOCAL SPOT LARGE

· 140 KV

· 40 MA

Note: Measure fall time only on the the 140kV/40mA scan.

2. Record the delay between the fall of the EXCM signal, and the 75% thresholdcrossing of the selected kV (on FORM F4879X – located in CHAPTER 11).

· Do not include the waveform overshoot.

· The 75% point for 140kV equals 105kV

Leave the scope connected for the next test.


ILLUSTRATION 8–5FALL TIME MEASUREMENT

FALL TIME

Ch.1

TP 22EXCM[TP5]

Ch.2

TP 30KVTB[TP11]

100% XRAY

FALL TIME EXAMPLE140kV/40mA

75% OF SE-LECTEDTECHNIC

Names of compo-nents on the46–321198G1 or2143147 kV boardare shown on thispage in [brackets].

Note: The 75% point for:80kV equals 60kV100kV equals 75kV120kV equals 90kV140kV equals 105kV



8–21

8–11 Verify Internal Scan Timer

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


6. Select the X–Ray Verification protocol (Rise Fall (DDC)) by clicking on theprotocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.

7. Toggle the softkey |Monitor Enable| to ON, to display the scan time in themessage log.

8. In the OBC, connect a scope to the kV board, as follows:

a. Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND,TP6) [TP3]. 2v/div



8–22

b. Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12]. 1v/div

c. Set the Scope Time base to 200msec, positive trigger.

9. Use DDC to take a stationary, 1.0 sec, 0mm, 100kV, 40mA, Large Focal Spotscan.

10. Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope and the displayed scantime from the message log. Spec limits are as follows:

Note: Scope Exposure Duration = 0.96 to 1.04 s.Displayed Exposure Duration = 0.99 to 1.02 s.


12. Toggle the softkey Monitor Enable OFF, to stop the scan time display in the message log.

· Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message logfilling with exposure information.

13. Disconnect the scope from the kV board.

14. Replace the OBC cover.



8–23

8–12 Site Ground Leakage Current Checks

CAUTION Turn OFF, tag and lock the wall power.

Use an ECOS1023H, or equivalent device, to measure the ground leakage currentpresent in the main system ground wire that connects the PDU cabinet to the wallground. If the system has an 80 kVA isolation transformer, measure the ground leakagecurrent in the ground wire that connects the 80 kVA isolation transformer to the wallground.

CAUTION TURN OFF, TAG, AND LOCK WALL POWER. BEFORE YOU DISCONNECT THEMAIN SYSTEM GROUND, TO INSTALL (OR REMOVE) THE ECOS1023H,TEMPORARILY INSTALL A GROUND JUMPER FROM THE WALL GROUND TOTHE PDU (OR 80 KVA ISOLATION TRANSFORMER, IF PRESENT). NEVERALLOW THE SYSTEM TO FLOAT, EVEN WITH THE POWER OFF.

1. Install the ECOS1023H in series with the main ground wire.

2. Remove the temporary ground jumper (see Caution, above) before you turn onthe wall power.

3. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION




8–24




8–25

6. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


8. Select the X–Ray Verification protocol (Ground Leakage ) by clicking on theprotocol name, and then select |Load| to load the protocol.



· 4 SECOND SCAN

· 1 SCAN

· 2 SECOND ISD

· 120 kV

· 400 mA

· 1:1 COMPRESSION FACTOR

· CALIBRATION VECTOR NONE

· LARGE FOV

· 0 mm APERTURE

· BODY FILTER

· SPOT SIZE LARGE

· OFFSET CORRECT


11. Make sure the ground current leakage, measured by the ECOS1023H, remainsless than 5mA during the scan.

12. Turn OFF, tag and lock wall power.

13. Install the temporary ground jumper. (See the Caution statement at thebeginning of this procedure)

14. Remove the ECOS1023H.

15. Remove the temporary ground jumper.

SITE GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT EQUALS < 5 MILLIAMPS


Chapter 8 Complete



8–26

APPENDIX 8A TUBE USAGE

Tube Usage StatisticsUse the tubeUsage tool to display a list of currently viewable tube usage files. The system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization.

1. Select |Trouble Shoot|

TROUBLESHOOT

2. Select |Tube Usage| .

3. Select |START| .

4. The screen prompts: “Tube to view::”

· Type 1 [Enter] to display the corresponding list of tube usage statistics.

· Type/enter Q to quit.

5. Select |Exit| .



8–27

ILLUSTRATION 8–6TUBE USAGE INITIAL SCREEN

TubeUsage

1

��

��

2345678cq

Tue Oct 17 23:37:45 1995Wed Aug 16 15:03:45 1995Fri Aug 4 18:39:29 1995Thu Aug 3 00:37:20 1995Fri Jul 29 17:19:41 1995Thu Jul 27 01:21:03 1995Thu Dec 23 11:36:46 1993Thu Jul 8 11:38:19 1993Cumulative StatisticsQuit

tube to view : :



8–28

Tube Date Installed

1 Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 19962 Fri Jul 29 22:00:55 19963 Tue Jun 29 20:42:02 1996c Cumulative Statisticsq Quit

Choose the tube # to display the following:

tube to view: 1Hospital: Name Address

Suite RPXX2Installed: Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 CDT 1996Removed:Last Scan: Thu Jan 5 08:29:17 CST 1996Housing Model #: 46–309500G2Housing Serial #: 89851EC0Insert Model #: 46–309300G2Insert Serial #: 316778TU0Failure Code:

Mode: Patient ScansNumber Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1)

Mode: Non–Patient ScansNumber Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning)

After the first tube change with an RP1.4 software (or later release), thetube usage screen displays the following information:

Mode: Patient ScansNumber Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1)

Mode: Non–Patient ScansNumber Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning)

Mode: Patient Scans Smart mANumber Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 400.54 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1)

Mode: Non–Patient Scans Smart mANumber Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X–Ray on)Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kWscans)KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour)Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning)

The Smart mA information duplicates the non Smart mA information, exceptthe kW Hours indicate any reduction in power, due to SmartScan use.



8–29

APPENDIX 8B TUBE HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING

Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning

Use this procedure on either an MX_165_CT_I tube, or an MX_200 tube . Run thisseries of scans on every new MX_165_CT_I tube, or MX_200 tube. You may alsohave to run this series on a tube that causes scan aborts or image streaks.

Note: If your system has the Performix Tube option installed (MX_200), see theappropriate parts of this procedure for tube type selection.

1. Select |SERVICE|


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION

3. Select |Auto mA Cal|

Auto mA Cal

System Integration

START



8–30

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


6. Abort the scan sequence after the Ductility warm–up completes.

Note: If you have just completed the ductility warm–up and auto mA cal, do not runthe ductility warm–up again, unless you allowed the tube to cool.


SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION





8–31

9. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


11. If you have a MX_165_CT_I tube installed, select the Tube Heat Soak protocol(hsscti ) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load theprotocol.

If you have a MX_200 tube installed, select the Tube Heat Soak protocol(hssgemini ) by clicking on the protocol name, and then select |Load| to load theprotocol.


13. Verify that the scans to be performed during DDC are as shown in Table 8–2 onpage 8–32 (MX_165_CT_I Tube), or as shown in Table 8–3 on page 8–33(MX_200 tube).

Note: Pass/Fail Criteria of the Heat Soak And Seasoning procedure:

The MX165 and MX200 tubes have different pass/fail criteria for high voltage errors.

Use criteria A, on page 8–32 for the MX165 tube.

Use criteria B, on page 8–33 for the MX200 tube.

To determine tube type either look at the ICD cards or from the Service Desktop select:|Utilities| , |Tube Display| , |Start| .

14. Select |FILE/EXIT| when complete.




8–32

TABLE 8–2HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS MX_165_CT_l SCAN TABLE

Scan Group kV mA Minimum ISD Number ofExposures

ExposureDuration

Pre Group Delay–Sec

Heat Input 80 300 2 24 3 2

Anode Sk1 120 200 5 25 3 3

Anode Sk2 80 300 1 9 1 2

Casing Sk1 80 300 12 90 2 12

Casing Sk2 120 200 7 10 1 7

Seasoning 1 90 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 2 100 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 3 110 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 4 120 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 5 130 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 6 135 50 5 5 0.1 5

Seasoning 7 140 50 5 10 0.1 5

Seasoning 8 145 50 5 10 0.1 5

Seasoning 9 150 50 5 15 0.1 5

Criteria A – MX165 Pass/Fail Criteria

When you run Tube Heat Soak and Stability, monitor the error log for high voltage overcurrents,shoot–throughs and spits. If you encounter errors during the seasoning steps, immediately stop theseries, and step back to the next lower KV seasoning cal series. Return to the failing station, andscan until error free. If the errors continue, repeat the process up to four times before you pull thetube.

Upon completion of the high voltage stability test, re–torque the locking ring on each H.V. cable (atthe tube) to 7+1 ft. lbs. or 84 +12 in. lbs. Also, tape paper towels around tube locking rings, toabsorb excess oil. Remove the paper towels after several rotations of the gantry.



8–33

TABLE 8–3HEAT SOAK AND STABILITY PARAMETERS MX_200_CT SCAN TABLE

Scan Group kV mA Minimum ISD Number ofExposures

ExposureDuration

Pre Group Delay–Sec

Heat Input 80 300 2 24 3 2

Anode Sk1 100 320 5 17 3 2

Anode Sk2 100 320 3 10 1 2

Casing Soak 100 270 16 90 2 60

Seasoning 1 100 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 2 100 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 3 110 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 4 120 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 5 130 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 6 135 50 5 5 1 5

Seasoning 7 140 50 5 10 1 5

Seasoning 8 145 50 5 10 1 5

Seasoning 9 150 50 5 15 1 5

Criteria B – MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria

1. If at any time during this procedure there is a scan abort which is due to the tube (i.e max spit rateexceeded, anode overcurrent .......) the operator shall try to resume the test. If before completingthis procedure there are more than three scan aborts then the test fails and the tube should bereplaced.

2. During the seasoning steps the spit count for each scan shall be monitored and if: – the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 5 then repeat that group – the spit count of either of the last two scans of each group exceeds 10 then backup to theprevious group and restart – if after 3 attempts to complete any scan group you are unsuccessful then the tube should be replaced.

See Flow Chart, page 8–34.



8–34

MX200 Pass/Fail Criteria Flowchart

n

Start Heat Soak & Season

RUNAnode Soak 1Anode Soak 2Casing Soak

Scan Abort

Seasoning Scan Group

Spits / Scan >5

LastGroup

Done

RESUMEScanning

Scan Aborts > 3

Scan Aborts > 3

Previous Seasoning Scan

Replace Tube

Retries < 3

Retries < 3

Previous Seasoning Scan

Increment to NextScan Group

y

ny

y

A

A

A

Ay

y

n

n

y

y

n

n

Ay

y

n

n

n

Scan Abort

Spits / Scan >10



8–35

APPENDIX 8C VERIFY MA AND KV

Verify mA and kVUse this procedure to verify the system currently meets kV and mA accuracies over therange of selectable technics.

1. Load the Exam Rx protocols from the DDC menu, –or– manually enter the scanparameters listed in the HHS form. (FORM F4879X – located in CHAPTER 11).

2. To use the DDC menu protocols, select |SYSTEM INTEGRATION|

SYSTEMIN-TEGRA-TION



4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .


6. Select the appropriate Protocol Name from the table below, and then select|Load| to load the protocol.

TUBE Type Small Focal Spot Protocol Name Large Focal Spot Protocol Name

MX_165_CT_I hhs_small_spot hhs_large_spot_MX_165CT_I

MX_200 hhs_small_spot hhs_large_spot_MX_200MCT


8. Press (Start Scan) when it flashes, to acquire the selected protocols.



8–36

· If necessary, refer to the system Operator Manual for scan instructions.

9. Record the Computer displayed kV and mA at 5ms, Anode kV, Anode mA,Cathode kV, Cathode mA and Total kV in the corresponding Tables in FORMF4879X for the Large and Small focal spots.

· You may use a signed/dated hard copy printout in place of recording the dataon FORM F4879X.

· The system also displays other non–HHS reportable kV/mA/scan time dataon the display, as a part of a quality check. Any data accompanied by anasterisk* is out of spec, and has to be fixed.

❏ Check box when complete.APPENDIX 8D APPENDIX 8E APPENDIX 8F APPENDIX 8G APPENDIX 8H APPENDIX 8I APPENDIX 8J APPENDIX 8K APPENDIX 8L APPENDIX 8M APPENDIX 8N



9–1

CHAPTER 9 – SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS


CHAPTER 9 CONTENTS

9–1 Introduction 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2 Required Tools 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3 Gantry Geometry Definitions 9–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4 Site Ground Current Checks 9–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5 Plane of Rotation (POR) 9–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6 X–Ray Beam on Detector Window (BOW) 9–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7 Isocenter (ISO) 9–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–7–1 Acquire ISO Air scans 9–14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–2 Acquire ISO pin scans 9–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–3 Analyze ISO scans 9–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7–4 Adjust Isocenter 9–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–8 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG 9–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–1 CBF 9–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–2 ADJUSTING CBF 9–21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8–3 SAG 9–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 9A Radial Alignment 9–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IMPORTANT:

· YOU MUST RECORD THE DATA COLLECTED IN THIS CHAPTER ON FORMF4879X, LOCATED IN CHAPTER 11 OF THIS BOOK.

· LOCATE THE HHS DATA, SENT FROM THE FACTORY, IN THE SOFTWARECOLLECTOR BOX. RETAIN THIS DATA WITH THE HHS DATA COLLECTEDAT THE SITE.



9-2

ILLUSTRATION 9-1SYSTEM ALIGNMENT OVERVIEW

Site GroundCurrent Checks

A B

POR

BOW

A --Tube Change Process

B --Detector Change Process

C --Collimator/Filter ChangeProcess

ISO

C

CBF & SAG

DetectorChange

Y Radial Alignment

N

End

(9-4)

(9-5)

(9-6)

(9-7)

(9-8)

(9-A)

(X-X) -- Paragraph #’s in this chapter

Fine ISO



9–3

9–1 IntroductionThe flowchart, Illustration 9–1, provides an overview of this chapter. Use the followingprocedures to make sure the X–Ray beam focuses directly upon the detector window.



· Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire)

· Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)

· ECOS 1023H Power Line–Leakage Current Tester (60HZ): 46–194427P248

· Adapter Cables for Power Line–Leakage Current Tester: 46–194427P249

· Polaroid type 52 film · Film developer

· Caliper Dial indicators · Masking tape

· Socket set · Torque wrench

· 48cm Phantom · Dial indicator mount

· Radial alignment tools · Radial dial indicator

· Copy of FORM F4879X from Chapter 11 of this manual

9–3 Gantry Geometry Definitions

Theta (Also known as ISO) Along the tangent to Gantry rotation, on the rotating structure.Move the X–Ray tube to the 180� (6 o’clock) position to equal 0� Theta.

· You can adjust the tube unit and collimator in the Theta direction.

Z Axis Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation, in the direction of cradle motion.

· You can adjust the tube unit and detector in the Z–axis direction.

· Positive Z Axis direction: Move the tube/detector toward the table

· Negative Axis direction: Move the tube/detector away from the table

Radial Along the radius, from the center of Gantry rotation, in and out from Gantryisocenter.

· You can adjust the detector in the Radial direction.

ILLUSTRATION 9–2GANTRY GEOMETRY

Theta (ISO)

0 degrees Theta

Scan Plane

Theta (ISO)

Z–Axis

Detector

Tube

RadialNote: You cannot adjust the tube or collimator

in the Radial direction. The Gantrydesign fixes this dimension.



9–4

9–4 Site Ground Current Checks

Check the site ground current before you proceed to the System Alignments.

Required Tools:· Beckman 3030 meter or equivalent

· Beckman CT231 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P228 (Fits up to #2 size wire)

· Beckman CT232 clamp–on Amp probe: 46–194427P270 (Fits #1 size wire and larger)

1. Power ON all equipment; NO X–Ray, and NO Gantry rotation.

2. Set meter range to the AC Current 2M switch position.

· Because the Amp probes equal 1000:1, the 2M range may give a 0.123reading, which equals 123 milliamps.

3. Use the appropriate clamp–on probe to measure the ground current at thefollowing locations. (Each location lists the maximum allowable current inparentheses.)

· A1 main system ground to PDU _________. (<300 mA)

· Operator Console #2 ground wire to Table Raceway _______. (<60 mA)

· Table #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA)

· Gantry #2 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<40 mA)

· PDU 1/0 ground wire to Table Raceway. _________ (<120 mA)

· Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _________ (<60 mA)

· Second Independent Console #2 ground wire to PDU. _______ (<60 mA)

4. If any of these measurements exceed the specified maximum, use the SystemGround Connection Illustration, located at the end of Chapter 2, in this Direction,to check the chassis ground.

· If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your District CT engineer for assistance.




9–5

9–5 Plane of Rotation (POR)

This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the X–Ray fan beam, to makeit perpendicular to the axis of gantry rotation within 0.010” (0.25mm) across the largestreconstruction circle (48cm). This procedure offsets the fan beam to account for theslight shift that occurs with heating of the X–Ray tube.

1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.

· If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Plane of Rotation,wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure.

–or–

· If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the Plane ofRotation, wait at least 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90minutes, if the tube unit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA xSec �1000] within the last 30 minutes.)

2. Mount the phantom holder, and 48cm phantom on the cradle.

3. Refer to Illustration 9–3. Tape a type 52 film at the 3:00 o’clock position on theoutside edge of the 48cm phantom, so the film projects into the Gantry.

· Orient the side of the film marked “This side toward lens” towards isocenter.

· When exposed and developed, the film shows the alignment of the twobeams with the table, at the left, as viewed from the X–Ray tube in the 3:00o’clock position.

4. Advance the cradle, and use the alignment lights to position the film for anexposure near the image center mark on the film pack.

5. Display the Service Desktop:

a. Select |Service|

b. Select |Replacement Procedures|

c. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| (DDC)

d. Select |Protocol Name|

e. Select |ta_por_10mm| ––Select |load|

f. Check Run Description Tube Align – POR 10mm

g. Select |Accept Rx|

h. Press the (Start Scan) Enable Button when it lights

i. Select |Dismiss|

6. Remove the film, mark the table side of the film, and develop it.

7. Refer to Illustration 9–3. Verify that the narrow (white beam) exposure lies withinthe wider (gray) X–Ray exposure.



9–6

ILLUSTRATION 9–3PLANE OF ROTATION

FILTER APERTURE KVP mA SCAN SPEED X–Ray ON X–Ray OFF

Body 10mm 80 40 4 sec. 0 360

XF XRXRXF

0.23”0.07” 0.23”0.07”

NARROW BEAMTUBE AT270_THETA

(BAD POR) (BAD POR)

TAPEFILMHERE

48cmPHANTOM

GANTRY

TABLE

ct2721

NARROW BEAMTUBE AT 90_THETA

TAPEFILMHERE

T T

Adjust Tube in the Table direction Adjust Tube in the Gantry direction



9–7

8. Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction.

· Both edges of each beam should be equally well–defined by the exit slit ofthe collimator, with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than thewide beam.

· If a difference in edge definition exists, check for gross Z misalignment.(Misalignment of the slit in the tube collimator adapter may cause the fuzzyedge.)

9. Refer to Illustration 9–3. Measure the 10mm exposure to determine the plane ofrotation.

a. Use a Vernier Caliper or comparable instrument with mm, or inch, scale tomeasure the widths of the wide beam that extend past the edges of thenarrow beam.

b. Call these dimensions XF (front distance) and XR (rear distance). Thedifference in center lines between the wide and narrow beam equals:(XF–XR)�2.

10. To meet the “cold” tube conditions and maintain the perpendicularity specificationof the fan beam:

HSA TUBE: XF must be slightly less than XR

· (XF–XR)�2 must fall in the range of 0 to –0.010� (0 to –.25mm)

PERFORMIX TUBE: XF must be slightly greater than XR

· (XF–XR)�2 must fall in the range of 0 to +0.010� (0 to +.25mm).

11. To calculate the amount of required movement:

· Take the difference between XF – XR; add 0.02; then multiply by 0.26 todetermine the amount of tube shift.

· Tube shift=(XF–XR+ 0.02) .26

Note: A positive tube shift value means “move the tube toward the table.”A negative tube shift value means “move the tube away from the table.”

12. To adjust the tube:

a. Barely loosen the large circular knurled nut.

b. Loosen the four (4) mounting bolts located on the Gantry/Tube mounting bracket.

c. Reposition tube, and tighten the bolts and nut.

· Recommended: Install a dial indicator on the bracket attached to the collimatormounting bracket and bearing, on the adjacent Gantry surface. Zero theindicator before you loosen the mounting bolts, then observe the amount ofindicator shift as you loosen the mounting bolts. Take this shift into considerationwhen you adjust the tube, so you obtain the correct adjustment distance afteryou tighten the mounting bolts.



9–8

13. If the 10mm beam exposure did not meet specification: Once you have adjusted the tube by the required amount, wait 5 minutes, andrepeat steps 3 through 12.

HSA TUBE:

· Measure the exposure. Verify that (XF–XR)�2 = 0 to –0.01” (0 to –.25mm).

· Wait 5 minutes, then proceed to the 1.0mm aperture exposure.

PERFORMIX TUBE:

· Measure the exposure. Verify that (XF–XR)�2 = 0 to +0.01” (0 to +.25mm).

· Wait 5 minutes, then proceed to the 1.0mm aperture exposure.

14. Display the Service Desktop:

a. Select |Service|

b. Select |Replacement Procedures|

c. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| (DDC)

d. Select |Protocol Name|

e. Select |ta_por_1mm|–– Select |load|

f. Check Run Description Tube Align – POR 1mm

g. Select |Accept Rx|

h. Press the (Start Scan) Enable Button when it lights

i. Select |Dismiss|

15. Remove the film, mark the table side of the film, and develop it.

16. Inspect the resulting film: (You do not have to measure the beam widths.)

· Make sure you can see the edges of the wide beam on either side of thenarrow beam

17. When the Plane of Rotation meets specification, tighten the four tube mountingbolts to a torque of 25 +2 ft. lbs.

Note: Hand–tighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattlingloose.

18. Record the completion of POR on FORM F4789X.




9–9

9–6 X–Ray Beam on Detector Window (BOW)

This procedure checks and adjusts the position of the detector window so that itintercepts the entire width of the X–Ray fan beam under worst case conditions. Thisprocedure offsets the beam to account for the fan beam shift toward the table that occurswith heating of the X–Ray tube.

THE GANTRY CONTAINS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS.MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR ANDGANTRY HVDC (550) ENABLE SWITCH BEFORE YOU ACCESS THEGANTRY. ALSO, MAKE SURE YOU READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CTHISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL, OR VIEW THE46–018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO, PRIOR TOSERVICING THE GANTRY SUBSYSTEMS.

1. Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.

· If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Beam onWindow test, wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignmentprocedure.

–or–

· If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the BOW, wait atleast 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool, if the tube unit had more than25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA x Sec �1000] within the last 30 minutes.

2. Remove any objects from the the Detector Field of view.

3. Turn ON the Gantry Loop Contactor switch.

4. Display the Service Desktop

5. Select |Replacement Procedures|


7. Select |Position Tube| , and position the tube to 0 degrees.

a. Type 0 degrees in the tube position data field, and press [Enter] .

b. When the message “Is Gantry clear?” appears, remove any objects from thegantry opening, and select |Yes| .

8. Turn OFF the Gantry Loop Contactor switch.

9. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) Enable switch.

WARNING��



9–10

10. Make sure the X–Ray tube remains in the 0 degree (gantry 12 o’clock) position.

11. With the detector at the 6 o’clock position, place three pieces of Polaroid film onthe detector, as shown in Illustration 9–4.

· Orient the film with the side marked, “This side toward lens,” toward the detector.

12. Butt the film’s metal strip tightly against the rotating base of the gantry.

13. Make a small pencil mark on both sides of the film, at the edge of the detectorwindow closest to the table.

14. Note the position of each film, and remove all three pieces of film.

a. Press heavily on the film, and draw a line between the marks you made onthe film.

b. This line must show on the film after you develop it.

15. Return the films to their positions on the detector.

a. Verify the pencil marks align with the detector window.

b. Secure the films with masking tape.

16. Turn ON the Gantry Loop Contactor switch.

17. Turn ON the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.

18. Select |DDC Protocol|.

19. Select |Name of Protocol| ––– Select |ta_bow| ––– Select |load|

20. Check Run Description Tube Align – BOW

21. Select |Position Tube| .

a. Type “0” in the tube position data field, and press [Enter] .

b. When the message “Is Gantry clear?” appears, remove any objects (exceptfilms) from the gantry opening, and select |Yes| .

22. Select the |Start Scan| softkey, when prompted.


24. After the scan completes, remove and develop the films.

· Mark the films to remember their relative positions. (R/L or Center)

25. Refer to Illustration 9–4. Draw two additional lines on the exposed films:

a. Draw one line exactly 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from the first line that you scribedon the film package in step 14., in the direction of the gantry. This is called”Original Line” in Illustration 9–4.

b. Draw another line exactly 1.24” (31.5mm) from the second line, in thedirection of the gantry. This is called ”Second Line” in illustration 9–4.

26. The center of the X–Ray beam must reside toward the gantry for the HSA tubeor toward the table side for the PERFORMIX tube, on the detector window.

· HSA TUBE: The x–ray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must fall within0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches (0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detector windowcenter, but displaced toward the Gantry, as shown in Illustration 9–4.

· PERFORMIX TUBE: The x–ray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must fallwithin 0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches (0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detectorwindow center, but displaced toward the Table side, as shown in Illustration9–4.



9–11

27. Use a vernier caliper, or pocket comparator with mm or inch scale reticle, tomeasure the difference between these center lines.

a. Measure the two edges between the exposure and the window.

b. For dimensions, XF (front) and XR (rear) the center line difference equals:(XF – XR)�2.

28. Use the following formula to see if the BOW meets specification:HSA TUBE:XF – XR = 0.06 � 0.030 inches or XF – XR = 1.0 � 0.8 mmPERFORMIX TUBE:XF – XR = –0.06 � 0.030 inches or XF – XR = –1.5 � 0.8 mm



9–12

ILLUSTRATION 9–4POSITION FILM FOR BEAM ON WINDOW

“B” EXPO-SURE

“A”

“A” = HSA TUBE“B” = PERFORMIX TUBE



9-13

29. Refer to Illustration 9–5. To adjust the detector:

a. Loosen all three detector mounting nuts, even if you plan to adjust only oneor two. (Bring the inside large nut back to finger tight.)

b. Loosen the adjustment locking nuts only on the mounts which requireadjustment.

c. Use the locking nut flats as a reference, and turn the mounting studs by thespecified number of flats, to bring the detector into alignment.

Note: Turn the mounting studs CW to move the detector toward the Ga ntry

d. Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench, and re–tighten the adjustmentlocking nut.

e. Re–tighten the detector mounting nuts.

· Torque each of the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.

· Hold the lower mounting nut, to prevent it from turning, while you tightenthe outside nut to 25 ft–lbs.

Do not over –tighten the mounting nuts. Because the detector no longer ha sshocks, excess force can twist and damage it.

30. Record the BOW result on FORM F4879X.


ILLUSTRATION 9-5DETAIL OF MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDW ARE

ct2775

BOW ADJUSTMENTLOCK NUT

BOWADJUSTMENT

DETECTORMOUNTING

NUTS

ALLEN HEADROTATIONALADJUSTMENT

SCREW

ROTATIONALADJUSTMENT

CAM


SCREW

DETECTORMOUNTING

NUTS


CAM

ALLEN HEADROTATIONAL

LOCKINGSCREW


LOCKINGSCREW


LOCKINGSCREW

CAUTION!



9–14

9–7 Isocenter (ISO)

This procedure aligns the tube focal spot with the detector center.

Start this procedure with a cold X–Ray tube unit.

· If you acquired any low technique scans prior to beginning the Isocenter test,wait at least 5 minutes before you start this alignment procedure.

–or–

· If you recently acquired image scans, and want to re–check the ISO, wait atleast 90 minutes, to allow the tube unit to cool. (Wait 90 minutes, if the tubeunit had more than 25 Kilojoules exposure, [kV x mA x Sec �1000] withinthe last 30 minutes.)

9–7–1 Acquire ISO Air scans

Acquire two ISO Air Scans (Lg & Sm focal spots) from the DDC menu.

1. Display the Service Desktop


3. Select |ISO Alignment|

4. Select |ISO Align – Large (DDC)|

5. Check Run Description Tube Align – ISO large

6. Select |Accept Rx| ––– Press (Start Scan) when it lights.

RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# ––– Exam_______Series_______Image_______

Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The imagenumber will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have theExam & Series #’s, the Image # is easily determined prior to thecalculation(s).

7. Select |Dismiss| to exit DDC.

8. Select |ISO Align – Small (DDC)|

9. Check Run Description Tube Align – ISO small

10. Select |Accept Rx| –––Press (Start Scan) when it lights.

RECORD Small Spot AIR SCAN# ––– Exam_______Series_______Image_______




9–15

12. After the system acquires the ISO air scans:

a. Follow the proper safety protocol to access the Gantry

b. Attach a round, 1/8” diameter metal shaft (3.175 mm shaft diameter) to theend of the table nearest the Gantry, or on phantom holder.

c. Turn ON the laser alignment lights.

d. Advance and adjust the table to position the metal shaft 1.4” up and 1.4”right of isocenter.

e. Make sure the shaft remains level (perpendicular to the scan plane.)

Note: IMPORTANT: Always use a round 1/8” diameter metal shaft. Neverposition the metal shaft directly on ISO center, always offset it.

The Software program that calculates tube movement for ISO Center looks for aSinusoidal waveform generated by the off–center metal shaft. A metal shaft,positioned at Isocenter, generates a waveform consisting of a straight line.

9–7–2 Acquire ISO pin scans

Acquire 2 ISO pin scans (Lg.& Sm. focal spots) from the ISO Alignment menu.



3. Select |ISO Alignment| ––– |Start|

4. Select |ISO Align – Large (DDC)|

5. Check Run Description Tube Align – ISO large.

6. Type/enter PIN LARGE in the scan description data field.

7. Select |Accept Rx| ––– Press (Start Scan) when it lights.

RECORD Large Spot PIN SCAN# ––– Exam______Series______Image______

Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The imagenumber will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have the Exam &Series #‘s the image# is easily determined prior to calculation(s).


9. Select |ISO Align – Small (DDC)|

10. Check Run Description Tube Align – ISO small.

11. Type/enter PIN SMALL in the scan description data field.

12. Select |Accept Rx| ––– Press (Start Scan) when it lights

RECORD Small Spot PIN SCAN# ––– Exam______Series______Image______


9–7–3 Analyze ISO scans

1. Select |Replacement Procedures| ––– |ISO Alignment| –– |Start|

2. Select |ISO Align| (get scan)

3. Identify the Four scans just taken. If the Image #’s are unknown, they will be thelast four images in the Exam & Series #’s recorded previously.



9–16

4. Select the first of the four scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.)

5. Select |Save Scan Data| of this scan file recorded in previous steps.

Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory ”/data/” andgiven a different identification number. When the number is displayed,record it for use in ISO calculations, select |Continue| and repeat for theother three scans. Refer to the following chart for an example:

Exam/Series/Image (EXAMPLE) Saved File Name (EXAMPLE)

Large Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/11 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.11.hdr.23003.scan

Small Spot Air Scan = 65101/2/12 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.12.hdr.23004.scan

Large Spot pin Scan = 65101/2/13 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.13.hdr.23005.scan

Small Spot pin Scan = 65101/2/14 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.14.hdr.23006.scan

This important number is assigned randomly by computer –––––––––^^^^^^

6. Select |Dismiss|

7. Select |ISO Align| (process)

8. For Help message showing proper syntax & format, type/enter iso_calc)

9. Type/enter [ ––– CASE SENSITIVE ––– ]

iso_calc –airscan /data/ [Large spot air scan#] –i /data/ [Large spot tool scan #]

EXAMPLE From previous chart

iso_calc –airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.11.hdr.23003.scan –i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.13.hdr.23005.scan

Note: If everything was typed accurately, the ISO Center channel values willbe reported on the first line of the report posted to the monitor screen.The amount that the tube should be moved up or down is given onsuccessive lines in this report.

10. RECORD CENT_AVERAGE for Large Spot =________________________

11. Repeat the ISO calculations using the files for the small spot.

iso_calc –airscan /data/ [Small spot air scan#] –i /data/ [Small spot tool scan #]


iso_calc –airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.12.hdr.23004.scan –i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.14.hdr.23006.scan

12. RECORD CENT_AVERAGE for Small Spot =________________________

Note: If the distance between the large and small focal spots exceeds 0.16channels, replace the tube.



9-17

13. Refer to Section 9–7–4, for tube movement instructions.

14. Rescan the ISO air and pin scans (Section 9–7–1 and Section 9–7–2) until thetube meets the ISO specifications.

Note: The system ISO specification equals the average of the large and smallISO values. This value should equal 373.75 + 0.02 channels.

15. Enter the saved focal spot alignment values.

Note: ISO center values are used during image construction, theref ore, this stepis required for proper system operation.

This section presumes you know how to use the ”jot text editor ”. Misuse of jot canseriously corrupt configuration files, which in turn causes severe system problems.

16. Open or go to a UNIX shell window.

-- or --

Select [Replacement Procedures ] --- [ISO Alignment ] --- [ Start ] ---[ISO Align(Update scanhardware.cfg) ]

17. Go to the config file directory: cd /usr/g/config <Enter>

18. Edit the scanhardware config file: jot scanhardware.cfg <Enter>

Note: Type filename exactly as indicated or the jot editor will dis play a blankscreen. If this happens, Exit jot from the menu bar and rety pe thecommand.

19. Scroll Down until you find the isoSmallSpot and isoLargeSpot values.

20. Change the values to the final values for ISO that you recorded.

21. Select File on jot’s menu bar and Save to save the changes to the file.

22. Select File on jot’s menu bar and Exit to get out of jot.

23. The following command will copy and overwrite the current ScanHardware configfile on the sbc:

rcp scanhardware.cfg <suitename>_sbc:/usr/g/g _config/ScanHardware. cfg <Enter>

ATTENTION The file that resides on the OC computer does not contain any CAPIT AL letters:

scanhardware.cfg

When it is copied to the SBC computer both the ’S’ and the ’ H’ are CAPITALIZED.

ScanHardware.cfg

’jot’ does not reside on the sbc computer ...!

CAUTION

!

!



9–18

9–7–4 Adjust Isocenter

Note: Whenever the CRT display shows that your ISO exceeds 373.75 +/– 0.1channels, you must create a new small and large AIR CAL (rerun AIR andPIN scans), once you have adjusted the tube position.

If the calculated ISOCENTER value does not meet specification, adjust the tubeunit by the amount displayed on the CRT. As an example, if the system reports:

Cent_AVERAGE: (Up and Down values will be given)Cent_down –.055 (DOWN in the negative direction means move the tube

UP.)Cent_up .055 (UP in a positive direction means move the tube UP.)

In the above example, the tube must be moved UP by .055. CAUTION: Both theLarge and Small focal spots must be calculated and averaged prior to anymovement.

1. Use a dial indicator gauge capable of measuring 0.001 inch to 0.250 inch(example: Starrett #25–141), attached to a nonmagnetic holding fixture, and boltthe gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube mounting bracket.

2. Zero out the gauge before you loosen the tube mounting bolts.

3. Loosen the four mounting bolts (9/16”) that fasten the tube unit to the Gantry mounting plate.

4. Loosen the top 3/4 inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw.

5. Move the tube in the recommended distance and direction, as measured by theISOCENTER gauge (i.e. DIAL INDICATOR).

· Turn the vertical adjustment screw clockwise to move the tube up.

· Turn the vertical adjustment screw counterclockwise to move the tube down.

6. Tighten the tube mounting bolts, and torque to 25 +/– 2 ft. lbs.

7. Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER meets the specification.

Note: If ISO falls outside 373.75 +/– 0.1 channels, you do not have to waitbetween tube adjustment and the test scan.

If ISO projects between +/–0.02 and +/– 0.1 channels, wait 5 minutes afteryou adjust the tube before you scan.

If ISO projects within 373.75 +/–0.02 channels, wait 5 minutes then repeatthe scan to verify the results remain within spec.



9–19

8. Wait 5 minutes, then recheck POR with the 10mm aperture, to verify the plane ofrotation remains unchanged.

· If the plane of rotation appears to change, DO NOT adjust the tube. Wait 30minutes and repeat the POR check.

· If the second check also shows a change in POR, adjust the tube to bring itinto specification, and check the X–Ray beam to Detector Window and ISOAlignments to make sure they still meet spec.

· ISO does not affect the detector Radial Alignment.

· You must always finish the tube alignments with ISO.

9. Record the final ISO value on FORM F4879X.




9–20

9–8 CBF (Center Body Filter) and SAG

This procedure aligns the center of the body filter, coincident with isocenter alignment, and measures thechange in alignment during a rotating scan. It reports the peak amplitude difference in channel numbers, aswell as the hysteresis, or difference in channel numbers between first and last views of a scan.

9–8–1 CBF

1. Move the table out of the detector field of view.

· Make sure nothing obstructs the attenuation of the X–Ray beam to detector window.


3. Select |System Integration|

4. Select |CBF & SAG Alignments| ––– |Start|

5. Select |CBF and SAG Align ( DDC )|

6. Check Run Description Tube Align – CBF.

7. Select |Accept Rx| –– Press the (Start Scan) button when it lights.

Note: The system will take two scans, one air and a scan with the filter in place.

RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# ––– Exam______Series_______Image_____

RECORD CBF & SAG SCAN# ––––– Exam______Series_______Image_____


9. Select |CBF Align| ( get Scan )

10. Identify the Two scans just taken. If the Image #’s are unknown, they will be thelast Two images in the Exam & Series #’s recorded previously.

11. Select the first of the Two scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.)


Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory /data/ andgiven a different identification number. When the number is displayed,record it for use in CBF & SAG calculations, select |Continue| and repeatfor the other scan.



CBF & SAG Scan = 65101/2/16 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan

This important number is assigned randomly by computer ––––––^^^^^^


14. Select |CBF Align| ( Process )

15. Type/enter cbf_calc (to display a Help message showing proper syntax &format)



9–21

16. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/imagefor the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE)

cbf_calc –airscan /data/ [Large spot air scan#] –i /data/ [CBF & SAG scan #]


cbf_calc –airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.15.hdr.23007.scan –i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan

· The system displays the average centroid value for the CBF, along withcollimator movement ( in mm ) recommendations, if any.

Cent_AVERAGE: (Up and Down values will be given)Cent_down –.048 (DOWN in the positive direction means move the Collimator DOWN.)Cent_up –.48 (UP in a negative direction means move the Collimator DOWN.)

In the above example the Collimator must be moved DOWN by .048 mm.

Note: To convert mm into inches: Multiply the displayed value in mm by 0.03937 = value in inches( or Divide by 25.4 to get value in mm )

17. RECORD: CENT_AVERAGE Value=_____________________________

18. If the calculated CBF value does not meet specification (373.75 +/– 0.2), adjustthe collimator by the amount displayed on the CRT.

9–8–2 ADJUSTING CBF

1. Wait 5 minutes between exposures.

2. Adjust the Collimator.

a. Mount a dial indicator gauge and its holding fixture to the special mountingbracket of the collimator.

b. Zero out the gauge.

c. Loosen the four collimator mounting bolts, located in the four slotted holes onthe collimator.

d. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt, located at the top of the collimator, to move thecollimator up or down by the specified distance.

· Turn the bolt clockwise to move the collimator down.

· Turn the bolt counterclockwise to move the collimator up.

e. Tighten the collimator bolts, and torque the four lock bolts to 10 +/–1.0 ft.lbs. (120 +/–12 in.lbs.).

3. Repeat the CBF scans, and collimator adjustment, until CBF falls within the373.75 +/– 0.2 channel specification.



9–22

9–8–3 SAG

1. Use the same scan files you used in CBF to run sag_calc .

2. Type/enter sag_calc (displays a Help message showing proper syntax &format).

3. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/imagefor the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE).

sag_calc –airscan /data/ [Large spot air scan#] –i /data/ [CBF & SAG scan #]


sag_calc –airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.15.hdr.23007.scan –i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.16.hdr.23008.scan

4. RECORD: CENT_PTP_DIFF (+/– 1.1 chan) Value=____________________

5. Verify SAG meets the CBF peak–to–peak channel difference of <1.1 channels.

6. Remove gauge and firmly tighten holding fixture in the gantry.


Chapter 9 Complete



9–23

APPENDIX 9A RADIAL ALIGNMENT

Use the Radial Alignment procedure to acquire default radial alignment Pin scans, andcalculate the centroid and detector adjustments. Position the tube to the bottom of theGantry for this procedure. Store: DD file results

Results displayed for radial alignment:

· Success or failure of scan performed

· Detector adjustments (screw adjustments distances and directions)

· Message “cannot find pin” (if software cannot locate the pin)

THE GANTRY CONTAINS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS.MAKE SURE YOU TURN OFF BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR ANDGANTRY HVDC (550) ENABLE SWITCH BEFORE YOU ACCESS THEGANTRY. ALSO, MAKE SURE YOU READ DIRECTION 46–018302, CTHISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL, OR VIEW THE46–018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO, PRIOR TOSERVICING THE GANTRY SUBSYSTEMS.

Radial Alignment (Cold Tube)

Note: Start with a cold tube unit. If you executed any low technique scans priorto beginning radial alignment, wait at least 5 minutes before you start thisalignment procedure. If you executed image scanning, and want tore–check radial alignment, wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit tocool, if the tube unit has greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure (kV x mA xSec/1000) within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result ininaccurate radial alignment.

Note: You do not have to check Radial alignment when you replace the tube.

1. Roughly adjust the ISO Alignment before you check radial alignment.

2. Use the Isocenter procedure, on page 9–14, to move the tube within 0.005” of thecorrect position (the average ISO value of the large and small focal spot).

· Don’t try to attain an ISO Alignment value of 373.75 +/– 0.02 channels, atthis time. Proceed to the Radial Alignment as soon as ISO falls within 0.005”of the specified range.

WARNING��



9–24

PROCEDURE:3. Display the Service Desktop

4. Select |Replacement Procedures| .

5. Select |RADIAL Alignment| ––– |Start|

6. Select |Radial Align| ( DDC )

7. Check Run Description Tube Align – RAD.

8. Select |Position Tube 180| ––– |OK| ––– |Dismiss| (Tube Positioning)


RECORD Large Spot AIR SCAN# ––– Exam______Series_______Image_______

10. After the air scan is complete: |Dismiss| ––– |Dismiss| (Radial Alignment)

a. Turn OFF the axial enable switch.

b. Turn OFF the Gantry HVDC (550) enable switch.

11. Open the front gantry cover; leave it open for the rest of the radial alignment.

Tool Placement and Scan1. Refer to Illustration 9–6. Install the rotational alignment tools on the detector.

a. The pin must project into the X–Ray beam.

b. Place the tool which contains the pin on the detector, but do not tighten itsholding screw.

c. Position the other tool over the pin, and insert the opposite end into thelocating holes on the detector, and finger–tighten the holding screws.

d. Make sure the tube remains in the 180 position.

e. Turn ON the gantry HVDC (550) enable switch. (You can leave the axialenable switch in the OFF position for this test.)

ILLUSTRATION 9–6RADIAL ALIGNMENT TOOL



9–25


3. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| ––– |Start|

4. Select Protocol Name , Load protocol |ta_rad|

5. Check Run Description Tube Align – RAD.

6. Check to ensure that the Position of the Tube is 180 degrees.


8. Press (Start Scan) when it lights.

RECORD RADIAL ALIGNMENT SCAN# ––– Exam_____Series_____Image_____

Note: The Exam and Series numbers will be visible during the scan. The imagenumber will flash for a moment at the end of the scan. If you have theExam & Series #’s the image # is easily determined prior to calculation(s).

9. Upon completion select |Dismiss| (back to Replacement Procedures)

10. Select |RADIAL Alignment| ––– |Start|

11. Select |Radial Align| (get Scan)

12. Identify the Two scans just taken. If the Image #’s are unknown, they will be thelast Two images in the Exam & Series #‘s recorded previously.

13. Select the first of the Two scans. (This is the Large Spot Air scan.)


Note: When the images are saved, each one is put into the directory /data/ andgiven a different identification number. When the number is displayed,record it for use in CBF & SAG calculations, select |Continue| and repeatfor the other scan.



RADIAL Alignment Scan = 65101/2/18 /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.18.hdr.23010.scan

This important number is assigned randomly by computer ––––––– ^^^^^^


16. Select |Radial Scan ( Process )|

17. Type/enter rad_calc (to display a Help message showing proper syntax &format)

18. Type the boldface character string, and substitute your own Exam/series/imagefor the example shown: (CASE SENSITIVE)

rad_calc –airscan /data/ [Large spot air scan#] –i /data/ [RADIAL scan#]


rad_calc –airscan /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.17.hdr.23009.scan –i /data/iq.CT01.65101.2.18.hdr.23010.scan



9–26

19. RECORD CENT_AVE___________________

· The system automatically displays the average centroid value andrecommended amount to rotate detector.

· The preferred radial adjustment limits: 376.4 +/– 0.2 channels.

20. Compare your value to the specification:

· If the system meets the radial adjustment limits, continue with the Isocenteradjustment, on page 9–14.

· If the value falls outside the 376.4 +/– 0.2 channel specification, proceed tothe adjustment section.

Radial Adjustment

Rotate the detector if the displayed value falls outside the 376.4 +/– 0.2 channelspecification.

1. Refer to Illustration 9–7. Use the rotational adjustment hardware and the radialdial indicator mounting fixture to install a dial indicator on the side of the detector.

2. Set the dial indicator to 0.000.

ILLUSTRATION 9–7ROTATIONAL HARDWARE

DETECTORMOUNTING

NUT


LOCKINGSCREW


HEX

DIALINDICATOR


LOCKINGSCREW

CT2830

3. Refer to Illustration 9–8, on the following page.

a. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly, until theyfeel finger–tight.

b. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.

4. Refer to the Average Centroid value display, and use the adjustment cam torotate the detector in the specified distance and direction.

5. After you complete the adjustment:

a. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws.

b. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ft–lbs.

c. Hold the inside nut to keep it from turning, while you torque the outside nutsto 25 ft–lbs.



9–27

ILLUSTRATION 9–8MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE (DETAIL)

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÈÈÈÈ

ÈÈÈÈÍÍ

ÍÍÍÍÍÍÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ

ct2775

BOW ADJUSTMENTLOCK NUT

BOWADJUSTMENT

DETECTORMOUNTING

NUTS


SCREW


CAM


SCREW

DETECTORMOUNTING

NUTS


CAM


LOCKINGSCREW


LOCKINGSCREW


LOCKINGSCREW

6. Repeat the radial alignment procedure, to verify the adjustment.

7. Record the actual Average Centroid value on FORM F4879X.




9–28

NOTESAPPENDIX 9B APPENDIX 9C APPENDIX 9D APPENDIX 9E APPENDIX 9F APPENDIX 9G APPENDIX 9H APPENDIX 9I APPENDIX 9J APPENDIX 9K APPENDIX 9L APPENDIX 9M APPENDIX 9N



10–1

CHAPTER 10 – SYSTEM TESTS


CHAPTER 10 CONTENTS10–1 Introduction 10–2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2 Calibration Process 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–2–1 Prepare the QA Phantom 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–2 Calibration Process Introduction 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–3 Check for the Presence of Cal Files 10–3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–4 Calibration Process A 10–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–2–5 Calibration Process B 10–7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–3 How to Scan with Protocols 10–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–4 Adjust CT Number 10–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5 How to Analyze Calibration data 10–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6 System Tests 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–6–1 Introduction 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–2 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure 10–13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–3 Tomographic Plane Indication 10–15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–4 Exposure Time Accuracy 10–16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–6–5 System Scanning Test 10–17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–7 Image Series 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–1 Scan Protocol 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–2 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation 10–18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–3 Image Series Term Definitions 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–4 Image Series for CT/i System 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–7–4–1 Analyze Image Series 10–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–7–5 QA Image Series 10–20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–8 IMAGE DATA SHEET 48cm/L 10–22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–9 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–10 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13 IMAGE DATA SHEET QA Phantom 10–27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–14 Save System State 10–28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning 10–29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX 10A Install Gantry Base Covers 10–30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10B Thermal Test 10–32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10C Increment Cradle 10–33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10D Streak Test 10–34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10E Artifact Definitions 10–35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10F Q–Cal 10–42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10G Calibrate Crosstalk 10–44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10H Generate Alpha Vector CaL 10–45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 10I Image Troubleshooting 10–46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



10–2

10–1 Introduction

This chapter contains descriptions of the Calibration Procedure, Initial Tests, SystemFunctional tests and the Image Series which you run before you turn the system overto the customer. The Image Series sections instruct you to scan system phantoms,record the means and standard deviations, and evaluate the image quality of theresulting images.

ILLUSTRATION 10–1��



10–3

N Number Check

Start

Did you load Q–Cal

Yes

No

End

1 Air Cal

Align

Phantom Cal

All Air Cals

Process B

Calibrations

T/G AlignmentTomographic Plane IndicationExposure Time AccuracySystem Functional TestsImage SeriesSystem State SaveHeat Soak & Seasoning

Phantoms

Cross–talkAlpha Vector

Process A



10–4

10–2 Calibration Process

New scanners are delivered with a System State MOD that holds the unique values for thehardware characterizations and imaging calibration. Restore these files from the MOD. If youno longer have these files or major system hardware has changed, you may need to createnew calibration files.

10–2–1 Prepare the QA Phantom

When the Quality Assurance phantom is new, it requires someone to attach the correct labelto it.

1. Fill the Quality Assurance (QA) phantom with distilled water.

2. Locate the multi–language sticker packet in the QA phantom shipping box.

3. Attach the sticker with the customer’s language to the face of the phantomhanger bracket.

10–2–2 Calibration Process Introduction

If your system has a factory supplied state MOD, you should have loaded the systemcalibration files during the Restore System State, section 5–13, on page 5–10 of thismanual.

· If you loaded the system cal files, proceed to section 10–2–4.

· If the system does NOT have cal files, proceed to section 10–2–5.

· To determine whether or not the system contains calibration files, proceed to section 10–2–3.

10–2–3 Check for the Presence of Cal Files

1. Select |SERVICE|

Service

2. Select |UTILITIES|

UTILI-TIES



10–5

3. Select |CAL ANALYSIS|

EDITORCALCULA-TORCALENDARSHELL

CAL ANALY-SISSCAN ANAL-YSISDD FILEANALYSISIMAGE ANAL-YSIS

4. Select |START| to open the Cal List/Select window.

. . . START. . .

· IF a Cal list appears (as shown below), somebody loaded the factorysupplied Calibration files during the Chapter 5 procedures. After youcomplete this section, you may proceed to section 10–2–4.

–or–

· IF the system does NOT display a list of calibrations, complete this section,then proceed to directly to section 10–2–5.

ILLUSTRATION 10–2CAL LIST/SELECT EXAMPLE

Air Y 80 3 ***** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

cal_LS

Group V KV Thick Phantom Spot Filter Date/Time

Q Cal Y 80 1 ***** Small ***** Wed Oct 4 20:29:05 1995

SelectGroup

Set SortMode

Module Valid

Save Module

Save Vector

Vector Show

SaveFull DB

Full DBRestore

XTALK Y *** ***** ****** *** Wed Oct 4 20:44:29 1995

Afterglow Y *** ***** *** **** *** Thur Oct 5 14:18:57 1995

Cold Q Cal N 80 1 ***** Small *** Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995


Water BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

Poly BH Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

Air Cal Scal Y 80 1 ******** Small Body Wed Nov 29 16:29:59 1995




Air Y 80 3 ***** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

Water BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

Poly BH Y 80 3 ******** Small 5 Mon Nov 29 16:29:59 1995

Medium Mis Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Thur Nov 27 16:29:59 1995

A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 27 16:29:59 1995

A Cal Scal Y 80 3 ******** Small Body Mon Nov 29 10:28:53 1995




This is a generic representa-tion of a cal list. Your sys-tem may appear sightly dif-ferent.



10–6

5. Select |Dismiss|

6. Select |Shutdown|

7. Display the Toolchest menu, and select |System Down| .

Note: Do NOT select |Log Out| at this time. Log out may inadvertently deletesoftware in the /usr/g directory.

8. After the system completes the shutdown, restart the system.

10–2–4 Calibration Process A

1. Select Daily Prep to warm up the tube and run auto–ma cal.

2. Select

Scanner Uti-lities

3. Select Detailed Calibration from the Scanner Utilities Menu.

4. Refer to Illustration 10–3. Select the following screen parameters:

a. Calibration Type: AIR

b. KV: Select all the kV settings for site use.

c. Aperture: 1mm, 3mm, 5mm, 7mm and 10mm.

Note: Do NOT select aperture “scaled”

ILLUSTRATION 10–3DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN



10–7

Detailed Calibration

KV 80KV 100KV 120KV 140KV

Aperture Scaled 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm

AirAdjust CTNumber...

Calibration Small Large Type SFOV SFOV



10–8

5. Run the selected Air Calibrations.

6. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom SelfCalibration procedure, on page 10–11.

10–2–5 Calibration Process B

Follow this calibration process when the system does not have the factory set ofcalibration files from the System State MOD.

1. Q–Cals, use Appendix 10F for reference, if required.

2. Cross–talk calibration, use Appendix 10G for reference, if required.

3. Alpha Vector calibration, use Appendix 10H for reference, if required.

4. Do Hot ISO calibration, if available.

5. Use the user select option, (NOT SmartCal), to acquire 1 Air Cal at120kV/1mm/large focal spot.

6. Use a bubble level and the Z–axis knob on the phantom holder to level thephantom.

7. Refer to Illustration 10–4. Acquire Air and Phantom Calibrations, with thefollowing parameters:

a. Calibration Type: AIR, Small FOV, Large FOV

b. KV: Select all the kV settings for site use.

c. Aperture: Scaled (equivalent to the RP SmartCal)

ILLUSTRATION 10–4DETAILED CALIBRATION SCREEN

Detailed Calibration

KV 80KV 100KV 120KV 140KV

Aperture Scaled 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm

AirAdjust CTNumber...

Calibration Small Large Type SFOV SFOV

8. When the calibration process completes, continue to the Phantom SelfCalibration procedure, on page 10–11.



10–9

10–3 How to Scan with Protocols

Locate the Manufacturing and Installation protocols under Infant area 20. Use these tohelp you prescribe System Tests. If you know the Protocol Number, you may enter it onthe Exam Rx Screen in the Protocol field. This describes how to select it graphically.

1. Select

New Patient

2. Enter Patient ID

3. Click left on the ‘‘Infant” anatomical figure icon.

4. Click left on the area below the infant’s feet. (inside circle)

5. Select a protocol from the list, to display the corresponding view edit screen.

· Optional Method: Enter the Protocol Number into the Protocol Number Field onthe Exam Rx Screen.



10–10

ILLUSTRATION 10–5PROTOCOL LIST (EXAMPLE)

20.1

20.2

20.3

20.4

20.5

20.6

20.7

20.8

20.9

20.10

20.11

20.12

20.13

20.14

Note: Because this Protocol list is sharedby manufacturing and service, it isused for many product offerings.Please read the instructions carefullyfor any scanning test. Verify thestated technique has been selectedbefore scanning and filling out thedata sheet. The protocol mayprescribe a technique that is notcorrect for your system. You maywaste time troubleshooting an imageproblem that only exists because aninappropriate technique was used.



10–11

10–4 Adjust CT Number

Run the small and large phantom self calibrations before you acquire the Image Series,or any time you doubt the N# values . The self calibration procedure modifies 48cmpoly phantom and 20cm water phantom CT numbers until water has a CT number equalto zero. After a successful self calibration, any water phantom scanned against a smallor large CAL has a CT number near zero .

1. Select |EXAM RX|

Exam Rx

2. Place the QA phantom on the phantom holder.

· Align the water section with the laser lights.

3. Select |SCANNER UTILITIES|

Scanner Utili-ties

4. Select Center Phantom from the Scanner Utilities Menu.

· Center the Phantom.

5. Select the Service Protocol N Numbers

(Protocol 20.9)

–or–

6. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–1 and 10–2.

TABLE 10–1SMALL CAL N #

Phantom Scan FOV kV mA Thickness Scan Time # of Scans Display FOV

20 S 140 140 10 4 2 25cm

20 S 120 200 10 4 2 25cm

20 S 100 240 10 4 2 25cm

20 S 80 170 10 4 2 25cm



10–12

TABLE 10–2LARGE CAL N #

Phantom Scan FOV kV mA Thickness Scan Time # of Scans Display FOV

20 L 140 140 10 4 2 25 cm

20 L 120 200 10 4 2 25 cm

7. Complete the scans.

8. Proceed to section 10–5, and use the worksheets in Table 10–3 and Table 10–4to record the values, and adjust the N numbers.

10–5 How to Analyze Calibration data

1. Select |SERVICE|

Service

2. Select |UTILITIES|

UTILI-TIES

3. Select |IMAGE ANALYSIS|

TUBE DISPLAY

CAL ANALYSIS

SCAN ANALYSIS

DD FILE ANALYSIS

IMAGE ANALYSIS

INSTALL OPTIONS

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .



10–13

5. When the Browser opens, select an Exam/Series to analyze.

6. Select |Manual ROI|

7. A viewer opens with a 14cm X 14cm box located in the middle of the image.

8. Click the right mouse button once to measure and display the ROI.

· To examine subsequent images: Click the right mouse button 2X to close theimage and result window, and select a new image from the browser.

9. Use the Table 10–3 worksheet record the phantom values for each technique.

· N# adjustment instructions begin with Step 10.

TABLE 10–3ADJUST CT NUMBER WORKSHEET

Small CAL 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV

Exam#

Slice 1

Slice 2

2 Slice Average

N#

Large CAL 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV

Exam# n/a n/a

Slice 1 n/a n/a

Slice 2 n/a n/a

2 Slice Average n/a n/a

N# n/a n/a

Use a 14 X 14 cm box; CTn = CTc–AvXc, where:· CTn = New CT number

· CTc = Current CT number

· AvXc = 2 slice avg. mean of the 14cm X 14cm box.

Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 +1.5

10. Select |Set/Adjust N#s|



10–14

11. When the N# adjustment tool opens, type/enter the values you recorded in Table10–3, into the table on the screen.

a. Start a new exam to accept the values you entered into the table.

b. Repeat the process until the N numbers meet the specification.

c. Fill in the following N Number Summary Table.

TABLE 10–4N NUMBER SUMMARY

Scan FOV 80kV 100kV 120kV 140kV

Small

Large n/a n/a

Specification for the 2 Slice Average= 0.0 +/– 1.5


10–6 System Tests


System Tests, described in the following sections, exercise all aspects of the system. Youwant to use them to assure system integrity, before turnover to the Customer. Although theMeans, Standard Deviation and Resolution specifications do not apply during systemfunctional tests, treat any artifact or image anomaly as a failure.

If you encounter a failure during the system tests:

· Record any evidence of artifacts, such as rings, streaks, shading, cupping, noise,or center artifacts.

· Correct artifacts, System Test or Image Series failures when they occur. Anydelay in repairs could increase the number of retests.

· Consult the General System Service Manual (2152918–100) Replacement Testand Verification Matrix any time you adjust, or replace a component to repair afailure. Locate the corresponding subsystem and component, if applicable.Follow the corresponding list of Minimum Retest Procedures.

10–6–2 Table/Gantry Alignment Procedure

1. Drive the table to its highest elevation.

2. Check the relationship between the cradle and the cradle drive end:

a. Set the gap between the angled rollers, to center the cradle over the driveend.

b. Make sure the cradle does NOT touch either angled roller.

3. To adjust the cradle, loosen the six cradle mounting bolts.

4. Turn on the alignment lights.

5. Advance the end of the cradle to the internal light.

· The cradle end should be parallel to the light, (assuming proper alignmentlight function).

· If necessary, adjust the table to bring the cradle end into parallel alignmentwith the light.



10–15

6. Align the front edge of the cradle with the laser light.

7. Select the Service Protocol Perpendicular Alignment

(Protocol 20.4)

–or–

8. Manually select the scan parameters in Table 10–5.

TABLE 10–5PERPENDICULAR ALIGNMENT SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type Direction kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. Algorithm

Axial Head First 120 40 Large 5 mm 2sec S0 Bone

Axial Head First 120 40 Large 5 mm 2sec I1000 Bone

9. Use over/under multi–image display to view both images at the same time.

10. Orient the vertical cursor to 90 degrees, and use it to verify that the left and rightedges of the cradle fall on a straight line. If the edges do NOT line up:

a. Loosen the table anchors at locations #5, #6 and #7.

b. Move the table half the distance.

c. Return to step 7. Repeat the procedure until the table edges line up.

d. Tighten the anchors, and torque to 75 +/– 6 N–m (55 +/– 5 ft–lbs).

e. Reinstall all the table parts you removed to access the anchors, includingcovers, ground straps and the center support bar.

11. Install the Table and Gantry covers.

· Appendix 10A , on page 10–31 contains the Gantry Base Cover installationprocedure.




10–16

10–6–3 Tomographic Plane Indication


2. Turn ON the internal alignment lights, and drive the phantom into the gantryopening, until the black line on the phantom lines up with the internal laser lights.

3. Verify that BOTH internal axial lasers line up along the black line on the QAphantom. If not, check table/gantry, cradle, and/or laser alignment.

4. Center the phantom in the scan plane with the Calibration program.

5. Select the Service Protocol Tomo Plane Indication

(Protocol 20.5)

–or–


TABLE 10–6TOMOGRAPHIC PLANE INDICATION SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. End Loc. Algorithm

Axial 120 100 Small 1mm 2.0sec I5.0 S5.0 Bone detail

7. Display the image series, and locate the scan plane indicator, the longest bar inthe bar pattern on the right side of the phantom.

· The right side of the phantom corresponds to the side of the image labeled Lon the display screen.

8. On the HHS Data Sheet (FORM F4879X – Chapter 11), record the scan location(shown on the image annotation) of the image with the darkest scan plane indicator(darkest long bar).

9. If your system meets all the installation and alignment specifications, the imageat scan location zero (S0.0) should contain the scan plane indicator. If scanlocation S1.0 or scan location I1.0 has the darkest bar, the system still meets thespecification.

· The scan plane deviation should equal S0.0 +/– 1.0mm.

· If necessary, adjust the internal alignment light position to meet the S0.0 +/– 1.0mm requirement.

10. Repeat the Tomographic Plane Indication test with the external alignment lights.

a. Use the external alignment light, and press the external landmark.

b. Verify the external light lines up along the black line on BOTH the left andright sides of the QA phantom.

c. The scan plane indication must fall within the S0.0 +1.0mm specification.

11. Check the box on Form 4879X .




10–17

10–6–4 Exposure Time Accuracy

1. Turn on Monitor Enable to read the scan times.

a. Select |End Exam| to halt any exam in progress.

b. Display the Service Desktop Manager.

c. Select |System Integration |.

d. Select |Diagnostic Data Collection| .

e. Select the DDC protocol (bleedersetup) .

f. Select |Monitor Enable | to display the scan times in the message log.

· Do NOT Dismiss, or close, the DDC window, because it turns OFF themonitor enable function.

2. Toggle to the Exam Rx desktop.

3. Select the Service Protocol Exposure Time Accuracy

(Protocol 20.6)

–or–


TABLE 10–7EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. End Loc. Pitch

Scout 120 40 – – – I10 S10 –

Scout 120 40 – – – I75 S75 –

Scout 120 40 – – – I300 S300 –

Axial 120 40 Large 10 mm 0.6sec S0 –



Helical 120 40 Large 10 mm – I145 S145 1:1

5. Complete the scans, and record the scan times displayed in the message log, onForm F4879X (Chapter 11).

6. When complete, toggle to the Service Desktop, and |Dismiss| the DDC windowto turn OFF the Monitor Enable function.

· Failure to turn OFF Monitor Enable fills the message log with kV, mA and scan times.




10–18

10–6–5 System Scanning Test

Use the System Scanning Test to verify hardware functionality. Review images forvisible artifacts, and review the message log for unacceptable errors.

1. Place the QA phantom on the cradle.

· Drive the table to an elevation of 100.

· Align the black line on the phantom with the internal laser lights.

Note: Never scan above 50 mA without first placing a phantom in the field ofview. Levels in excess of 50 mA can cause temporary radiationdamage to the detector that lasts several hours. If you acquire imageseries cals with a radiation damaged detector, the cals may causeartifacts in subsequent image series scans.

2. Select the Service Protocol System Scan/Cust Qual Reli

(Protocol 20.8)

–or–


TABLE 10–8SYSTEM SCANNING TEST SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. End Loc. Tilt/Pitch

Scout 120 40 – – – S200 I800 0°

Scout 120 40 – – – S200 I800 90°

Cine 120 50 Large 10mm 30sec S0 S0 1.0

Axial 120 50 Large 10mm 1.0sec S0 S0 I30

Axial 120 50 Large 10mm 1.0sec S0 S0 S30

Helical Full 120 50 Large 5mm 30sec S70 I75 1:1

Helical Plus* 120 50 Large 5mm 30sec S70 I75 1:1

4. Complete the scans.




10–19

10–7 Image Series

10–7–1 Scan Protocol

The person who acquires the image series has the responsibility to review theimages, and verify they meet the specifications listed on data sheets.Responsibilities also include making the means and standard deviationmeasurements, and keeping a record of failures that occur during the image series.

Recommended Scan ParametersUnless otherwise stated, use the following scan parameters during the Image Seriesacquisition:

· Scan FOV equal to display FOV (Field of View)

· 512x512 matrix size

· Peristaltic ON

Failure CriteriaConsider any image series scan that does not meet specifications as failing.For means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass.

Any failure on a particular technique requires at least 10 additional slices to evaluateeffectively.

Phantom must be levelSystems with metal–free cradles have a phantom holder with a perpendicularadjustment (Z–axis) knob on it. Each time you change phantoms, make sure you usea bubble level, and the Z–axis knob on the phantom holder, to level the phantom.

Image Troubleshooting

If you loaded the factory supplied phantom calibrations on your system, and youfollowed the System Alignment and Air Calibration procedures in this manual, theimage series should pass. If you encounter image failures with the factory suppliedcal files, consult the Image troubleshooting flowchart in Appendix 10I , on page10–47.

10–7–2 Data Recording: Means and Standard Deviation

Use the IMAGE DATA SHEETS in sections 10–8 through 10–13 on pages 10–23through 10–28 to record the results of the Image Series testing.

Any failure on a particular technique requires at least a 10 additional slices to evaluateeffectively. For means and standard deviations, 90% of the slices must pass.

· Record means to 2 decimal places, and round to the nearest one–tenth, (onedecimal place) when you compare the resulting values to the spec.

· Record standard deviations to 2 decimal places, then round off to one decimalplace, to compare it to the spec.

· Average standard deviations : Use two decimal places to average the values,then round off to one place.

Before you record the means and standard deviations, check the image data sheets todetermine whether to average the means and standard deviations, or record them sliceby slice.

· Make sure you record all the required Image data on the HHS data sheets (FormF4879X – Chapter 11).



10–20

10–7–3 Image Series Term Definitions

Xc Mean CT number for the specified center coordinates of the phantom image.

AvXc Average Mean CT number for the center of the phantom image: Average the meanCT value for all specified center coordinates of all slices in an exam.

Xo Mean CT number for the outside of the phantom image: Average the mean CT valuefor all specified outside coordinates of one slice.

AvXo Average outside mean CT number for the number of slices in an exam.

AvSDc Average image noise about the center image coordinate (measured as the standarddeviation) of all slices in an exam.

AvSDo Average image noise (standard deviation) for the outside of a phantom: Average ofall outside coordinates of all the slices in an exam.

10–7–4 Image Series for CT/i System

1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder.

· Align phantom with the internal laser lights.

· Center the phantom with the Calibration program.

2. Select the Second Series of the Service Protocol, Image Series 48cm

(Protocol 20.10)

–or–


TABLE 10–9CT/I IMAGE SERIES SCAN PARAMETERS

ScanType

Phantom kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. # of scans

Axial 48cm 120 400 Large 10 mm 4.0 sec S0 4

4. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEET, page 10–23, and verify the imagesmeet specifications.

5. Proceed to section 10–7–4–1, to analyze the image series.

10–7–4–1 Analyze Image Series

1. Display the Service Desktop |Utilities| menu.

2. Select |Image Analysis| .

3. When the Browser opens, select the 48cm Exam.

4. Select |Series Means| to open a viewer and results window.

5. The results window reports the series means data.

· Record the results data on the IMAGE DATA SHEET, page 10–23, andverify the values meet all specifications.



10–21

10–7–5 QA Image Series

1. Place the QA phantom, 46–241852G1, on the phantom holder.

· Align the black line with the laser lights.

· Center with the Calibration program.

2. Select the Service Protocol Image Series QA

(Protocol 20.12)

–or–


TABLE 10–10IMAGE SERIES QA SCAN PARAMETERS

ScanType

PhantomType

kV mA SFOV Thickness ScanTime

# of scans Comments

Axial QA#1 120 170 Small 10 mm 2.0 sec 4 S0.0

Axial QA#1 120 170 Small 10 mm 2.0 sec 4 Bone Retro w/DFOV = 15cm


Axial QA#2 120 170 Small 10 mm 2.0 sec 4 S35.0Peristaltic OFF


4. Retrospectively reconstruct the first QA#1 scan with the Bone algorithm, and15cm Display FOV, for later analysis.

· Use the parameters in Table 10–10 to reconstruct the image.

5. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEETS , pages 10–23 through 10–27, andverify the images meet specifications.

6. Proceed to section 10–7–5–1, to analyze the QA image series.

10–7–5–1 Analyze QA Image Series

Return to the Image Analysis tool.

1. Select the QA Exam from the Image Browser.

2. Select |QA#1| to open a viewer and results window.



10–22

3. Refer to Illustration 10–6, to adjust the image window:

a. Press and hold the middle mouse button.

b. Move the mouse in the horizontal and vertical directions to adjust theWindow Width and Window Level, until the line pair patterns become visible.

ILLUSTRATION 10–6ADJUST WINDOW WIDTH/LEVEL WITH MOUSE

Move for Window Level Adjust

Move for Window Width Adjust

Hold Down

4. Refer to Illustration 10–7. To position the ROI box, and analyze:

a. Move: Position the mouse cursor over the box. Press and hold the leftmouse button, and move the mouse to reposition the box.

b. Accept: Click the right mouse button once, to accept the current position.

c. Accept: Toggle the right mouse button to accept the remaining ROIs.

5. The system calculates and displays the MTF and Contrast Scale in the ImageAnalysis Results window.

ILLUSTRATION 10–7REPOSITION ROI WITH MOUSE

ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ

Move

2X Click to exit.

Click once to accept

12

3

You cannot reposition Box 1. It auto-matically appears over the F line pairs.

6. Double click the right mouse button to exit.

7. The software automatically evaluates the QA#2 & 3.

· Select the Exam/Series and the QA#2 or QA#3 Softkeys to execute.

8. Record the data on the IMAGE DATA SHEETS , pages 10–24 through 10–28 andverify the scans meet all specifications.



10–23

10–8 IMAGE DATA SHEET48cm/L

Scan parameters: 48cm/L/10mm/120KV/400mA/4sec

Exam ## ofSlice

AvXc AvXoAvXo–AvXc AvSDo Comments

ScanTechAprov

SPECS ––– ––– ––– +/–8.5 ––– < 14.0 ––– –––

Box Size: 45 x 45 pixelsCenter Coordinates: 256, 256Outside Coordinates: 256, 60

452, 256256, 45260, 256

Image Acceptance/Date: _______________

Certified Image Reviewer:_______________

Artifact Limits:

· Rings: 48/L; 30 to 36 counts42/L; 15 to 18 counts1mm; NA

· Band: 8.0 counts

· Band Radius: 0 to 23.5cm

· Clump: 48/L; 3.0 SIGMA42/L; 2.2 SIGMA1mm; N/A

· Center Spot: N/A

· Center Artifact: N/A

· Smudge: 48/L; 6.8 counts1mm; 14.0 counts42/L; 6.1 counts1mm; 12 counts

· Streaks: 4.0 counts



10–24

10–9 IMAGE DATA SHEETQA Phantom

QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 secScan at 0mm– Use this scan data for following Bone Retro. Record data on Form F4879X .

Exam ## ofSlice

MTFMTF

4 sliceaverage

Contrast Scale Comments/ArtifactsScanTechAprov

–––

–––

–––

SPECS ––– 0.68 to 1.0 110.0 to 130.0 ––– –––

Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels



For Reference Only:Use this manual method to calculate MTF and Contrast Scale only when you cannot access Tool QA#1.

AB

C

D

E

F

ROI A

ROI BROI C

Contrast Scale = mean of B–mean of C.

SDA = SD of ROI Box over F slits.

SDave = (SDB + SDC ) /2

Modulation =

MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)

CT2723

SDA2 –SDave

2�



10–25


QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/Bone Retro/DISPLAY FOV=15cmScan at 0mm

Exam ## ofSlice

LinePatternsVisible

Comments/ArtifactsScanTechAprov

SPECS B,C,D,E,F ––– –––



QA#1 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/340mA/1 sec Scan at 0mm Record results on Form F4879X .

Exam ## ofSlice

MTFMTF

4 slice average

Contrast Scale Comments/ArtifactsScanTechAprov

–––

–––

–––

SPECS ––– 0.65 to 1.00 110.0 to 130.0 ––– –––

Box Size: 17 x 17 pixels





10–26


QA#2 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 sec/Peristaltic OFFScan at 35mm (S35.0)

Exam#and

Slice#

Visible Holes(View at window of 20) Contrast Factor Comments/Artifacts

ScanTechAprov

SPECS See Below 2.0 to 12.0 ––– –––

Contrast FactorVisible Number of Holes:

Lower Limit*Visible Number of Holes:

Upper Limit*Smallest Visible Hole:

Size

2.00 to 3.99 2 5 7.5 mm

4.00 to 7.99 3 5 5.0 mm

8.00 to 12.00 4 5 3.0 mm

*Required number of visible holes depends on the contrast factor.2 out of the 4 scans taken must meet this specification.



For Reference Only :Use this manual method to calculate the Contrast Factoronly when you cannot access Tool QA#2.

10mm 7.5mm 5.0mm 3.0mm 1.5mm

ROI D

ROI E ROI D 49 X 9 pixels x=256, y=200 ROI E 49 X 9 pixels x= 256, y=235Contrast Factor = Mean E – Mean D



10–27


QA#3 scan parameters: S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 secScan at 50mm Record data on Form F4879X.

Exam ## ofSlice

Mean Std Dev Average Std Dev(average of 4 slices)

Comments/ArtifactsScanTechAprov

–––

–––

–––

SPECS 0.0 + 1.5 ––– See Below* ––– –––

Box Size: 51 x 51 pixels at Coordinate 256, 256

*If tube has < 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.60. If tube has > 5000 scans, spec = 3.00 to 3.80.





10–28


QA#3/S/10mm/120KV/170mA/2 secDo not scan. Evaluate images from previous step.

Exam ## ofSlice

AvXc AvXoAvXo–AvXc Comments/Artifacts

ScanTechAprov

SPECS ––– ––– ––– ––– –––

Box Size: 31 x 31 pixelsCenter Coordinates: 256, 256Outside Coordinates: 256, 95

417, 257256,41795, 256

Artifact Limits:

· Rings: 4.0/4.8 cts

· Band: 2.8 cts

· Band Radius: 0–8.5 cm

· Clump: N/A

· Center Spot: N/A

· Center Artifact: 3.5 Std. Dev.

· Smudge: 2.2 counts1 mm; 4.0 counts

· Streaks: 4.0 cts





10–29

10–14 Save System State

The procedure that follows tells how to create, update or restore the System State on MOD.The MOD used must have a UNIX file system. Any MOD formatted for images cannot beused.

Note: DO NOT SAVE State after you reload software UNTIL you restore the REALState; new software puts system defaults on the disk. If you save statebefore you restore, you will be saving defaults.

Note: Prevent this MOD from being labeled as an IMAGE ARCHIVE MOD becausethis step will format the MOD differently without mentioning there aresystem files on it.

1. Load a new or the system MOD into the drive on the front of the console. AnMOD that has been labeled for IMAGE ARCHIVE cannot be used because it hasa different format than a system MOD.

Use the Service Desktop Manager Commands that follow, to create the SystemState MOD.

2. Display the Service Desktop Manager:

3. Select |PM|

4. Select |System State| to open the System State Save/Restore menu.

5. Select |All| or the items that are appropriate to archive.

· Protocols Scan, DDC, Archive

· Characterization Table, Gantry, InSite

· Calibration Tube, HV, Gantry, DAS, Detector, SW

· Configuration Network, Filming, Timezones, InSite

· Auto Voice

· Display Preferences

6. Select |Save|

7. When the save operation completes, the LED on the drive will stop flashing and itwill be safe to select |File| and |Quit| from the pull down menu.

8. Remove the MOD from the drive. Mark it so that no one will use it for IMAGEARCHIVE.

9. To restore System State from this MOD, follow the same procedure as above insteps 1. through 8., but at step 6., instead of selecting |Save| , select |Restore| .




10–30

10–15 Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning

1. If you ran the Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning during Generator Calibration, skipthis section.

2. Refer to Chapter 8 , Appendix 8B for details of how to perform Tube Heat Soakand Seasoning .


Chapter 10 Complete



10–31

APPENDIX 10A INSTALL GANTRY BASE COVERS

Gantry Base Cover Installation

Note: This procedure references the Base Cover Installation drawing,46–297782, shown on the next page. (Illustration 10–8). A copy of thisdrawing also ships with the system.

The rear raceway assembly, p/n 46–297628G1, item 12 on the installation drawing,consists of raceway pan 46–297624P1, cover plate 46–297627P1. and raceway cover46–297623P1. Install to gantry using 4 screws, p/n 46–170015P2 and 4 washers, p/n12–277, items 13 and 14 on the installation drawing. If the site uses floor troughs,discard cover plate, 46–297627P1. Some installations do not require the rear raceway.

Note: Leave all cover screws loose until all covers and screws are in place.

1. Install the four extensions, p/n 506A657P71, item 11, as shown on theinstallation drawing, illustration 10–8.

2. Install the base cover 46–297214P1, item 3, as shown on the installationdrawing, with four screws 46–208560P129, item 7 on illustration 10–8.

Note: It is physically possible to install this cover backwards. The side of thecover with the slotted holes faces the back of the gantry.

3. Install the base cover 46–297212P1, item 1 on the installation drawing, with twoscrews, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.


5. Install the base cover 46–297213P1, item 2 on the installation drawing, withthirteen screws, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.

6. Install the base cover 46–297215P1 , item 4 on the installation drawing, withthirteen screws, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.

7. Install the top cover of the rear raceway, item 12 of the installation drawing, withsix screws, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.



10. Install the base cover 46–297268P1 item 9 on the installation drawing, with twoscrews, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.

11. Install the base cover 46–297223P1 item 6 on the installation drawing, with twoscrews, 46–208560P129, item 7 on the installation drawing.

12. This completes the gantry base cover installation.



10–32

ILLUSTRATION 10–8BASE COVER INSTALLATION DRAWING

1

(2)7

(2)11

12 13(4)14(4)

2

9

(2)7

(3)7

(6)7(4)7

(3)7 (6)7

(2)710

4

(6)7(4)7

3

6(2)7

8

(2)7

(2)7

5 (2)11



10–33

APPENDIX 10B THERMAL TEST

Start the thermal test with a cold X–Ray tube. Allow the tube to cool at least 60minutes before starting this test.


· Align the water section of the phantom with the internal laser lights.

· Use the Calibration program to center the phantom.

2. Select the Service Protocol Service Generic Scan

(Protocol 20.1)

–or–


TABLE 10–11THERMAL TEST SCAN PARAMETERS

ScanType

Phantom kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time Start Loc. # of scans

Axial QA 120 200 Small 1 mm 4.0 sec S0 1



4. Record the Std Dev data on the following data sheet, and verify the images meet specifications.

Thermal Test Data Sheet

Exam #______________________

1 mm ______________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________ 1mm slice difference_________________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________ 10mm slice difference________________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________ < 4.0 cts YES______________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________ Technician_________________10 mm _____________ Date_______________________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________10 mm _____________1 mm ______________



10–34

APPENDIX 10C INCREMENT CRADLE

Cradle Incrementation

Use this test to verify the following:

· Cradle position agrees with the commands sent from the OC

· Gantry display within SPEC over a 300 mm range.

1. Cover the cradle with a blanket, or protective material.

2. Load the cradle with a least 34kg (75 lbs) of weight.

3. Extend a metric tape measure at least 300mm, and tape it on the cradle top,next to one of the edges.

4. Turn on the patient alignment lights.

5. Drive the cradle into the gantry, and align a convenient point on the tapemeasure, such as 50mm, with the internal axial lights.

6. Use the scan RX menu to acquire a scan at location I100 mm.

· Do not worry about technique and image quality during the cradleincrementation test.

7. Turn on the patient alignment lights.

8. Record the distance of cradle movement from your starting point.

9. Repeat this procedure at the following scan locations:

· I200 mm

· I300 mm

· 0 mm

10. Verify your recorded measurements fall within the minimum and maximumspecifications listed in Table 10–12.

TABLE 10–12CRADLE INCREMENTATION SPECS

Scan Location Minimum Distance Recorded Distance Maximum Distance

I100 99.75 mm 100.25 mm

I200 199.75 mm 200.20 mm

I300 299.75 mm 300.25 mm

S0 –0.25 mm 0.25 mm

Tech_________________________ Date __________



10–35

APPENDIX 10D STREAK TEST

1. Place the 48cm phantom on the phantom holder.

· Align the phantom to the internal laser lights.

· Use the Calibration program to center the phantom.

2. Select the Service Protocol Streak Test

(Protocol 20.2)

–or–


TABLE 10–13STREAK TEST SCAN PARAMETERS

Scan Type kV mA SFOV Thickness Scan Time # of scans

Axial 120 200 Large 5 mm 1.0 sec 50

4. Evaluate all images for streaks or rings.

5. Fix all streak or ring failures.

All 50 slices ring and streak free ? YES ______



10–36

APPENDIX 10E ARTIFACT DEFINITIONS

Center Smudge

Definition:A dark or light area, with no defined edges, located near the center of thereconstruction.

Method of Measurement for all images, including 12.5 cm (5 inch):

· 48cm/L and 42cm/L images: position a 13x13 pixel ellipse over the smudge, andmeasure the mean of the smudge.

· Other techniques: position a minimum 13x13 pixel ellipse (169 pixels), over thesmudge, and measure the mean of the smudge, If necessary increase the sizeof the ellipse to approximate the size of the smudge.

Reference Mean· 48cm/L and 42cm/L techniques: position a 41x41 pixel ellipse about the

center of the reconstruction circle, and use it to measure the reference,background mean.

· Other techniques: Use an ellipse at least 4 times larger than the ellipse used to measure the mean of the smudge, to measure the reference,background mean.

Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the mean of the smudge and thereference exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique.

Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm

48/L ––– ––– ––– 48/L

42/L ––– ––– ––– 42/L

––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––

35/L ––– ––– ––– –––

20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– –––

If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L having passed that technique.

Failure Rate:80% of all scans at a given technique must meet the spec.



10–37

Rings

Definition: A dark or light circle, or partially closed circle, approximately 1 to 3 pixels in width.

Method of Measurement:

Ring mean value: Deposit two ellipses bordering the ring or partial ring.

· Take care not to include pixels outside the ring within the ellipses. (You maymagnify an image up to 3X to help determine if a ring or partial ring exists.)

· Most rings consist of a dark and light ring pair; measure one color ring at a time.

48cm/L and 42cm/L techniques: the ring must equal 0.5cm radius (1.0cm diameter), orgreater.

· Measure rings smaller than 0.5cm radius for clump.

· Rings must have an arc of 30 degrees or greater to be considered a ring.

· Bone detail images must have a ring with at least a180 degrees arc to fail.

Background mean value:Position a 2cm x 2cm (or larger) box over an unmagnified image, so it includes the ringor partial ring, and measure the mean.

Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the ring mean and the backgroundmean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique. The Image AnalysisProgram spec limit equals 1.2 times the spec limit of the manual measurement.

Application:


48/L ––– ––– ––– –––

42/L ––– ––– ––– –––

––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––

35/L ––– ––– ––– –––

20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– –––

If either the 48/L or 42/L pass the test for a given kV and aperture, consider both the 48/L and 42/L as having passed that technique.

Failure Rate:48/L and 42/L techniques: 80% of all slices must meet the spec at a given techniqueAll other technique: No more than one ring every 250 slices



10–38

StreaksDefinition :Straight dark or light lines, of any length, across an image, usually 1 to 3 pixels in width.

Method of Measurement :

Mean of the Streak:

· Use the trace to outline the streak in a magnified or unmagnified image, thenmeasure distance or deposit cursors to measure.

· Most streaks consist of a dark and light streak pair, measure only one colorstreak at a time.

· Measure the mean of the streak.

Background mean:

· Measure the mean on both sides of the streaks.

Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the mean of the streakand the background mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique.

Application :All images fall under the streak spec requirements.

Failure Rate:It takes 100 streak free scans after the initial streak, to clear the streak failure. A repeatstreak at the same location with 250 scans or less between streaks requires correctiveaction.

Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances

Definition:Same as for Streaks above, except that High Voltage disturbances cause these streaks,which result in missing DAS views. Often streaks of this origin occur in multiples, andappear to emanate from a common point. We refer to multiple streaks of this type as‘fan beam’ streaks.

Method of Measurement:Use CD plot to look for missing views. A failure occurs when each group of 3 or fewercontiguous missing views creates streaks in the corresponding image.

Application:All images fall under the “Streaks Caused by High Voltage Disturbances” specrequirements.

Failure Rate:

Run the Heat Soak/Seasoning on systems that fail either of the following specs:· 48cm 120kv/400ma/1mm/1sec scans: Ten images may contain a total of one

group of 1 to 3 contiguous missing views that cause streaks.

· All other techniques: One group of 1 to 3 contiguous missing views that causestreaks, allowed in 250 scans.



10–39

Center Artifact

Definition:A dark or light, well defined spot, 4 pixels in size, located in the center 16 pixels of thereconstruction circle.

Method of measurement:

· Reference mean and standard deviation: Measure the mean and standarddeviation of a 41 x 41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256.

· Center Artifact Average (Ave.) The average of the 4 center pixel located at X(256,257) and Y (256,257) or the average of any four pixel square box whichincludes any of the four center pixels.

Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and theReference Mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique.

Application:


––– 35/M 35/M 35/M –––

35/L ––– ––– ––– –––

20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S


Center Spot

Definition:A dark or light area, consisting of 3 to 25 pixels that has no defined edges, located nearthe center of reconstruction.

Two types of failures can cause this artifact:

· Center Spot: Compare the mean of a 5x5 pixel box near the center to a 21x21pixel box about the center.

· Max pixel requirement: A positive center spot places a maximum limit on themaximum value(s) allowed in the 5x5 pixel box.


· Background mean: Measure the mean of a 21x21 pixel box centered at X=256,Y=256.

· Center spot mean: Measure the means of all 5x5 pixel boxes which include pixelX=256, Y=256 (25 5x5 boxes exist).

· Max Pixel value: Measure the most positive pixel in each of the 5x5 pixel boxes.

· Subtract the background mean from the center spot mean.



10–40

Failure: The technique fails when the difference between the Center Artifact Average and theReference Mean exceeds the corresponding limit value for that technique.

100kV and 140kV Failure:· The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5

· The center spot fails when the difference equals or falls below –3.5.

· The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.8 and the Max Pixelvalue equals or exceeds 4.0.

120kV Failure: (5mm and 10mm only)· The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.2


· The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 1.5 and the Max Pixelvalue equals or exceeds 4.0.

120kV failure: (1mm only)· The Max pixel fails when the difference equals or exceeds 2.4 and the Max Pixel

value equals or exceeds 6.4.

· No Center Spot for 1mm scans

80kV Failure:· The center spot fails when the difference equals or exceeds 3.5


· No Max pixel for 80kV scans

Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1 mm(Max Pixel Only)

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– 12.5/S


Clump

Definition:Light or dark areas of varying intensity, consisting of 3 or more contiguous pixels at thecenter of reconstructions


Reference mean and Standard Deviation (Std. Dev.): Measure the mean and standarddeviation of a 41x41 pixel box centered about X=256 and Y=256.

Find all pixels in a 9x9 pixel box, centered about X=256, Y=256, that fall outside the limitsof the reference mean plus/minus the value of the reference std. dev. times the limitnumber given for a technique.



10–41

Failure: A failing clump consists of three or more pixels that touch, and exceed the limiton the same side of the reference mean (more positive or more negative)

Application:

10mm 5mm 3mm 1mm

48/L 48/L 48/L –––

42/L 42/L 42/L –––

If at any technique, one of the above passes, consider that technique as having passed.


Banding

Definition:A dark or light circular area, greater than 3 pixels in width. The band may have less than360 degrees of arc.


Mean of band:· Position two non–overlapping boxes, approximately the width of the band, over

the worst portion of the band. (Use one box when the band occurs near thecenter of the the image, and/or space is limited.)

· Use a square or rectangular box with an area of at least 50 pixels.

· The mean of the band equals the average of the box means.

Background mean:

· Measure the mean of a box inside the radius of the band, and the mean of a boxoutside the radius of the mean, on a radial through center of reconstruction.

· Use the average of the inside and outside means as the background mean.

· Use the same box size you used to measure the mean of the band. (Positionboth boxes on one side of the band, when the band occurs near the center of thethe image, and/or space is limited.)

The image fails for band if the difference between the background mean and the meanof the band exceeds the corresponding spec limit for that technique.

Application:

10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1mm Radius*

48/L ––– ––– ––– 48/L 0–24.0

35/L ––– ––– ––– ––– 0–15.8

––– 35/M 35/M 35/M ––– 0–17.5

20/S ––– ––– ––– 20/S 0–8.5

12.5/S ––– 12.5/S ––– ––– 0–5.1

* All location radii in cm.



10–42

Failure Rate:80% of all scans at a given technique must pass the band requirements.

Visual Acceptability

In addition to the artifacts described in this appendix, review several techniques for visualacceptability. Manufacturing Staging reviews the 12.5/S scans and the Tommy (AdultSkull) Phantom for visual artifacts.

· 80% of all slices at a given technique must pass the corresponding visual artifactinspection.

· “Repeating artifacts” do not include artifacts that move or change color.

Phantom Replacement Verification

This table explains what you should do if you have to replace a phantom, to verify thatthe new phantom is acceptable.

Components Task Verification Test

48 cm or 35 cm Scan two slices at:120kV/200ma/10mm/4sec

Look for voids or hard spots in the images.

QA Tomographic plane indication (internal lights only).Acquire QA scans for image quality checks.


Certified Image Reviewer: _______________


Certified Image Reviewer: ________________



10–43

APPENDIX 10F Q–CAL

Run the Q–Cal procedure before you start to calibrate and scan.

Note: The Q–Cal function destroys all old phantom calibrations.

Important: Observe the following:

· Turn ON DAS power at least 2 hours before the start of calibration

· Start Q–Cal with a very cold tube. Do NOT take any exposures for at least oneand one half hours before you start Q–Cal. (This also means NO tube warmup).Complete tests that do not interfere with tube cooling during this wait.

· Make sure the mylar window centers on the patient alignment lights. Animproperly centered mylar window could cause Q–Cal to fail, because one of themylar window’s metal bands could shade the detector.

Note: Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Seriespasses, repeat Q–Cal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since youcompleted the last Q–Cal.

Q–Cal1. Select |SERVICE|

Service


SYS-TEMIN-TEGRA-TION

3. Select |Calibration| .



10–44

4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. Select Cal Types in order number of scans

· 1– Cold Qcal 40 scans

· 2– Heat Qcal 30 scans

· 3–Hot Qcal 40 scans


When to run Q–Cal

Note: Recommended: In order to increase the chance that the Image Seriespasses, repeat Q–Cal if more than 96 hours have elapsed since youcompleted the last Q–Cal.

Run Q–Cal any time you adjust or replace any of the following components. The original Q–Cal remains valid until you:

· Adjust or replace the Collimator

· Replace the X–Ray tube

· Replace the Detector

· Move or replace one or more ADC Boards.

· Adjust Plane of Rotation (POR)

· Adjust Beam on Window (BOW)

· Adjust Isocenter



10–45

APPENDIX 10G CALIBRATE CROSSTALK

1. Select |SERVICE|

Service




4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. Select Cal Type number of scans

· 4 – Xtalk Air 4 scans

6. Reference the table to report the the table height to the Gantry Display.

7. Position the table as low as possible.

8. Adjust the phantom holder as high as possible, with respect to the table.

9. Place the Crosstalk phantom on the phantom holder, and use the alignmentlights to center it.

10. Raise the table 180 mm from the centered position.

11. Acquire the Crosstalk phantom scans.

12. Select Cal Type number of scans

· 5 – Xtalk Phantom 8 scans




10–46

APPENDIX 10H GENERATE ALPHA VECTOR CAL

1. Select |SERVICE|

Service




4. Select |START|

. . . START. . .

5. Select |alpha vector| to open a Shelltool

6. Select Cal Types in order number of scans

· 6 – Afterglow 2 scans

Note: Do NOT exit this program until the rotor comes down, so the softwarecan calculate and install the afterglow vector.

7. When the rotor stops, select |Shutdown| to shut down the system.

Note: Do NOT select the Log Out function at this time, as it mayinadvertently delete software in the /usr/g directory.

8. Display the Toolchest Menu , and select |System Down| .

9. When shutdown completes, restart the system.




10–47

APPENDIX 10I IMAGE TROUBLESHOOTING

Image Troubleshooting

Use this flowchart when you troubleshoot image problems on a system with factorysupplied calibration. This flowchart assumes you followed the Alignment andCalibration procedures in this manual.

Start

End

Center Smudge

Full Phantom

Rings in Image

90min Tube Cool Down

POR w/film

QCAL

Air/Phantom Cals

Shoot Image Series

Calibrations

UniformityCupping

(Brings X–Ray beamto a known state)

BOW



10–48

NOTES



11–1

CHAPTER 11 – F4879X

11–1 Form F4879X (Total of Eleven pages)

Record the system installation data on the following eleven pages of Form 4879.

Keep any HHS data sheets sent from the factory with the F4879X data collectedduring the installation. Then keep in a safe place.



11–2

NOTES



11–3

DATA RECORD FOR CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE

Where Installed

City State

Customer’s Telephone Number Room No.

System I.D. No.

Operator’s Console (Master Control)

Model Number Serial Number

System Gantry

Model Number Serial Number

Dates of Tests Performed by

Test Equipment Used (If Applicable)

Name Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Calib. Due

HV Bleeder

Oscilloscope

DMM

TraceabilityThe Component Locator Installation Report has been completed and sent to the Product Locator File.

Yes No

Certified Component Changes

Equipment Model Number Serial Number Install Date Exp. Ctr. Reading

Old Tube Casing

Old Tube Insert

New Tube Casing

New Tube Insert

Old Detector

New Detector

Old Collimator

New Collimator

Old Anode Tank

New Anode Tank

Old Cathode Tank

New Cathode Tank



11–4

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CHECKS

Inst. Tube

Det. Col. HVTank

P.M. Procedure is required for those components listed (Not crossed out).

Det.

Tube

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Inst. P.M.ÇÇÇÇÇÇ mA METER CHECK *HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _______________

Circuit ON

A/D Range

Anode mA 15 – 25

Cathode mA 15 – 25

DVM – A/D = DeltaCompare Delta to Limits

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. mA METER VERIFICATION *HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _______________

Circuit OFF Circuit ON

DVM A/D Delta Limits +/– DVM A/D Delta Limits+/–

Anode KV 0.0 � � 0.5 Anode KV 50.0 � � 7.5

Cathode KV 0.0 � � 0.5 Cathode KV 50.0 � � 7.5

Total KV 0.0 � � 0.5 Total KV 100.0 � � 15.0

Anode mA 0.5 Anode mA 4.5

Cathode mA 0.5 Cathode mA 4.5

DVM – A/D = Delta � Ignore these values at this time.Compare Delta to Limits

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M.ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ New Tube Seed Shift Completed: �



11–5

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Tube ‘Z’ Axis Alignment (Formerly Tube Plane of Rotation, POR) Completed: �

1. Z–Align Used: Adjusted In Specification. (go to Detector Z–Axis, step A)

OR2. Tube Plane of Rotation (POR) using Film.

Choose Tube Type:

MX165CT

10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to –0.01” (0 to –0.25mm) 1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual

(go to Detector Z–Axis, step B or C)MX200

10 mm Aperture measurement spec 0 to +0.01” (0 to +0.25mm) 1.0 mm Aperture beam is visual

(go to Detector Z–Axis, step B or C)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇDetector Z–Axis (Formerly Beam On Window, BOW) Completed: �

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment,then detector Z–Axis will already be within specification. No additionaladjustment will be necessary.

OR2. Using Trapezoid Alignment Tool “Beam on Window” is within Spec.

OR3. Using Film

Choose the correct tube type:

MX165CT

Three films are taken and the X–Ray Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the followingspecifications. Note that the Beam is off–centered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward theGantry.

XF – XR =+ 0.06” � 0.03” Record XF _________________(+1.5mm � 0.8mm) Record XR _________________

Subtract _________________

MX200

Three films are taken and the X–Ray Beam must be centered on the face of the Detector within the followingspecifications. Note that the Beam is off–centered on side of the Detector Window Center which is toward the Table.

XF – XR = –0.06” � 0.03” Record XF _________________(–1.5mm � 0.8mm) Record XR _________________

Subtract _________________



11–6

ÇÇÇÇ

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Radial Alignment Completed: �

Average Centroid at pin scan: Spec: 376.4 � 2 channels,if it is within limits, then no adjustment is needed.

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. Tube Signal/Noise Output Check Completed: �

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Isocenter Completed: �

Avg. of Large and Small Focal Spots: Spec: 373.75 � 0.02

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Center Body Filter (CBF) Completed: �

Adjust CBF Value: Spec: 373.75 � 0.2

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

HVTank

Inst. Tube P.M. VERIFICATION OF HV TANK FEEDBACK RESISTORS *HHS REQUIREMENT

(Formerly, Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors) Initials: _______________

1. Using KV Test (Only if KV test baseline available) fill in chart: Verification of total kV

Nominal kV Expected Measured % Deviation � 1%

100

OR2. Using HV Divider and Oscilloscope

Anode and Cathode

Technic Anode Divider Displayed Anode KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV

100/50L 0.5

Technic Cathode Divider Displayed Cathode KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV

100/50L 0.5

Anode Divider – Displayed Anode = delta KVCathode Divider – Displayed Cathode = delta KVCompare delta KVs to limits.



11–7

Anode and Cathode computer displayed readings have a limit of 50.0 +/– 0.5 KV.

Total KV

Technic Cathode and Anode Di-vider

Displayed Total KV Delta KV Limits +/– KV

100/50L 1.5

(Cathode & Anode Divider) – Displayed Total KV = delta KVCompare delta KV to limits

KV Meter Verification

Circuit OFF Circuit ON

DVM A/D Delta Limits +/– DVM A/D Delta Limits+/–

Anode KV 0.0 0.5 Anode KV 50.0 7.5

Cathode KV 0.0 0.5 Cathode KV 50.0 7.5

Total KV 0.0 0.5 Total KV 100.0 15.0

Anode mA � � � 0.5 Anode mA � � � 4.5

Cathode mA � � � 0.5 Cathode mA � � � 4.5

DVM – A/D = Delta � Ignore these values at this time.Compare Delta to Limits

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. Auto mA Cal Completed: �



11–8

HVTank

Inst. Tube


P.M.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET * HHS REQUIREMENT

Data sheet complete and meets specification Initials: _________________(attach print out/film from system if available)

SMALL FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC

At 5msSpec Lim-

its Cathode Anode Spec Limits for

KV mA KV mA for mA at5ms

KV mA KV mA TotalKV

Total KV Cathode mA

80 40 34–44 78.4–81.6 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 78.4–81.6 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 78.4–81.6 95.0–105

150 128–165 78.4–81.6 144–156

200 170–220 78.4–81.6 193–207

300 255–330 78.4–81.6 291–309

100 40 34–44 98–102 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 98–102 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 98–102 95.0–105

150 128–165 98–102 144–156

200 170–220 98–102 193–207

240 204–264 98–102 232.2–247.8

120 40 34–44 117.6–122.4 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 117.6–122.4 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 117.6–122.4 95.0–105

150 128–165 117.6–122.4 114–156

200 170–220 117.6–122.4 193–207

140 40 34–44 137.2–142.8 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 137.2–142.8 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 137.2–142.8 95.0–105

130 110–143 137.2–142.8 124.4–135.6

170 144–187 137.2–142.8 163.6–176.4

Since the MX200 tube uses a metal / ceramic frame, some of the electrons hitting the target actually bounce off andare captured by the frame. This causes a frame current and the resultant measured anode mA is slightly less thanthe cathode mA. Typically this difference is between 5 & 10%. The cathode mA is the true indicator of radiationoutput. Because of this difference, the CT/i system has been changed to control cathode mA rather than anodemA, as originally designed.



11–9

HVTank

Inst. Tube


ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. KV and mA VERIFICATION DATA SHEET (CONTINUED) * HHS REQUIREMENT

Data sheet complete and meets specification Initials: _________________(attach print out/film from system if available)

LARGE FOCAL SPOT TECHNIC

At 5msSpec Lim-

its Cathode Anode Spec Limits for

KV mA KV mA for mA at5ms

KV mA KV mA TotalKV

Total KV Cathode mA

80 40 34–44 78.4–81.6 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 78.4–81.6 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 78.4–81.6 95.0–105

200 170–220 78.4–81.6 193–207

300 255–330 78.4–81.6 291–309

400 340–440 78.4–81.6 389–411

100 40 34–44 98–102 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 98–102 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 98–102 95.0–105

200 170–220 98–102 193–207

300 255–330 98–102 291–309

## 400 340–440 98–102 389–411

## 420 357–462 98–102 408–432

120 40 34–44 117.6–122.4 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 117.6–122.4 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 117.6–122.4 95.0–105

200 170–220 117.6–122.4 193–207

300 255–330 117.6–122.4 291–309

400 340–440 117.6–122.4 389–411

140 40 34–44 137.2–142.8 36.2–43.8

70 59–77 137.2–142.8 65.6–74.4

100 85–110 137.2–142.8 95.0–105

200 170–220 137.2–142.8 193–207

300 255–330 137.2–142.8 291–309

340 289–374 137.2–142.8 330.2–349.8

## Note: 100kV, 400mA is used as the test point for MX165 tube, the MX200 tube uses 100kV, 420mA.



11–10

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Inst. TubeÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M.ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

RISE AND FALL TIMES * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _________________

Technic

KV mA Rise Delay ms Limit Fall Delay ms Limit

80 400 0 +1.9ms Not Applicable

140 40 Not Applicable 0 +2ms

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Inst. TubeÇÇÇÇ

P.M.ÇÇÇÇÇÇ VERIFICATION OF INTERNAL SCAN TIMER * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _________________

Technic

KV mA Oscilloscope Expo-sure Duration

Limit Displayed ExposureDuration

Limit

100 40 0.96–1.04 sec 0.99–1.02 sec


Inst. Tube

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

EXPOSURE TIME ACCURACY * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials:

_________________

Scout Scans

Technic Distance Displayed Exposure Duration Limit

20 mm 0.258 – 0.278

150 mm 1.98 – 2.04

600 mm 7.920 – 8.095

Axial Scans

Technic Time Displayed Exposure Duration Limit

0.6 Large FOV 0.605 – 0.655

1.0 0.960 – 1.04

4.0 3.84 – 4.16

Helical Scan

Technic Duration Displayed Exposure Duration Limit

30 sec 28.8 – 31.2



11–11


Inst. TubeÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. OPERATOR INDICATORS * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _________________

X–Ray Indicators on Front and Back of Gantry Illuminate During X–Ray


Inst. TubeÇÇÇÇÇÇ

P.M. X–RAY BEAM LOCATION * HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _________________

Tomo Plane Indication Accuracy Refer to system service manual and verify that the relationship of the alignment lights to the x–ray beam is compliant.

� Internal Lights (1mm)

� External Lights (1mm)

� All align. lights are visible with room lights at max. settings.

IMAGE PERFORMANCE

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Z–Axis Correction (Formerly QCAL) Completed: �

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment: No QCAL is necessary. (go to Image Calibration, step A)

OR2. Q–CAL completed In Specification. Adjusted In Specification. (go to Image Calibration, step B)

HV

Tank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Image Calibration Completed: �

1. If Z–Align was used for ‘Z’ Axis Alignment: Only Air Calibrations are necessary.

OR2. Air and Phantom Calibrations completed and ‘N’ Number adjustment completed.

The Number of Phantom Cals will vary depending on Site Specific scanning protocols.



11–12

HVTank

Inst. Tube

Det. Col.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

IMAGE QUALITY CHECK *HHS REQUIREMENT Initials: _________________

48cm Large – Peristaltic On

Scan at maximum 120 KV technique, one of either:48cm/LargeSFOV/120/400/10/4sec/1slice48cm/LargeSFOV/120/300/10/4sec/1slice

Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below.

Visual results acceptable?.......................................................Yes: �

ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations: 255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255

AvXo Xc AvXo – Xcless than 8.5 cts

AvSDoless than 14.0@400mAless than 16.2@300mA

MTF – Peristaltic On

Small Focal Spot (120kv/170ma/2sec) 0.68 __________ 1.00(4 slice average)

Large Focal Spot (120kv/340ma/1sec) 0.65 __________ 1.00(4 slice average)

�

�

�

�

�

�

��

��

Contrast Scale = mean of B–mean of C.

SD = SD of ROI Box over F slits.

SD = (SD + SC ) /2

Modulation =

MTF = 2.2 (Modulation/Contrast Scale)

��

�

��

��

��

Unusual Aliasing, Other Artifacts

Visual inspection for unusual aliasing, and other artifacts.(QA#1 (bars)/Small SFOV/120kv/170ma/10mm/2sec/1slice




11–13

CT Number Check, Noise Check, Cupping Check

Visual inspection for Rings and bands. Cupping per chart below.QA#3 (water)/Small SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1slice


ROI box size: 45 x 45 pixels at locations: 255, 255 255, 59 255, 451 451, 255 59, 255

AvXo Xc0.0 � 1.5 cts

AvXo – Xcless than 2.0 cts

SDcgreater than 3.00

less than 3.60(3.80)*

*If the tube has > 5000 scans on it, the upper standard deviation spec is 3.80, rather than 3.60.

CT Number Check Medium** Not applicable for RP

Check CT# at center.QA#3 (water)/Medium* SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV

ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm at locations: 255, 255

––– Xc0.0 � 1.5

––– –––

––– ––– –––

CT Number Check Large

Check CT# at center.QA#3 (water)/Large SFOV/120/170/10/2sec/1 slice/25cm DFOV

ROI box size: 14cm x 14cm pixels at locations: 255, 255

––– Xc0.0 � 1.5

––– –––

––– ––– –––


Inst. TubeÇÇÇÇ Heat Soak / Seasoning Completed: �

COLLIMATOR CHANGE–––required test data – Z axis detector alignment Polaroid–––Form 2579 – submit immediately



11–14

NOTES

GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)

GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626283, rue de la Miniére, B.P.34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Documents

Ge Cti Install